Instruction Manual

1M23Z03702

Technical updates and additional programming examples available at: http://www.futaba-rc.com/faq
Entire Contents © 2013

T$%/(O)CONT(NT6
INTRODUCTION............................................... 4Ɣ6upportaQG6HrYLcH......................................... 4
Ɣ$ppOLcatLoQ([portaQG0oGL¿catLoQ........... 5ƔDH¿QLtLoQVof6\mboOV...................................... 6
Ɣ6afHt\3rHcautLoQV GoQotopHratHwLthout
rHaGLQJ ............................................................. 6

Ɣ%attHr\CharJLQJ............................................ 31+owtocharJHthH%attHr\............................. 31
Ɣ+owtoturQON/O))thHtraQVmLttHr.......... 3:hHQturQLQJoQ............................................ 3:hHQturQLQJoff............................................ 3ƔRHJLVtratLoQofthHuVHr VQamH..................... 3Ɣ+omHVcrHHQ.................................................... 33%()OR(U6(................................................... 10ƔUVHrmHQu........................................................ 34Ɣ)HaturHVof);-.......................................... 10

Ɣ/LQNprocHGurH );-/R70086% ................ 35ƔCoQtHQtVaQGtHchQLcaOVpHcL¿catLoQV........... 11ƔRaQJHtHVtLQJ\ourR/CV\VtHm...................... 37

Ɣ$ccHVVorLHV....................................................... 1ƔTraQVmLttHrcoQtroOV....................................... 13
CautLoQVoQhaQGOLQJaQtHQQa...................... 14/(DmoQLtor................................................... 14
6wLtch 6$-6+ ............................................... 15
Rotar\trLm T1-T4 ....................................... 15/LQHarVOLGHr /6R6 ..................................... 15
9oOumH /DRD ............................................ 15+omH/([LtU.mHQu/0oQ.%uttoQ................. 15
TouchVHQVor................................................... 16
6tLcNaGMuVtmHQt............................................. 17
6DcarG............................................................ 18+owtorHmoYHarHarcaVH............................ 19
CoQQHctor/3OuJ............................................... 0
IQVtaOOatLoQaQGrHmoYaOofthHbattHr\........ 0
TraQVmLttHrtra\............................................. 1ƔRHcHLYHrQomHQcOaturH................................... ƔR70086%C+moGH......................................... 3ƔRHcHLYHr VaQtHQQaLQVtaOOatLoQ...................... 4
Ɣ6afHt\prHcautLoQVwhHQLQVtaOOLQJVHrYoV... 5
Ɣ6.%U6/6.%U6IQVtaOOatLoQ............................ 6

R(C(I9(R$ND6(R9OIN6T$//$TION 38
RHcHLYHraQGVHrYoVcoQQHctLoQ.................... 38
6HrYocoQQHctLoQb\moGHOt\pH................... 39$LrpOaQH/*OLGHr.............................................. 39+HOLcoptHr........................................................ 41

0OD(/%$6IC6(TTIN*3ROC(DUR(... 4
$LrpOaQH/*OLGHr.............................................. 4
+HOLcoptHr........................................................ 44)UNCTION6O)6<6T(00(NU................ 48
TraLQHr............................................................. 49
DLVpOa\............................................................. 5
UVHrNamH....................................................... 53
6ouQG............................................................... 54+/:6HttLQJ..................................................... 55
6tart6(/........................................................ 57$uto/ocN........................................................ 60
IQformatLoQ.................................................... 61
6.%U66HrYo................................................... 6Ɣ6.%U6:LrLQJH[ampOH................................... 7
Ɣ6.%U66\VtHm................................................ 8
Ɣ6.%U6/6.%U6DHYLcHVHttLQJ......................... 9ƔTHOHmHtr\6\VtHm............................................ 30%$6ICO3(R$TION....................................... 31)UNCTION6O)/IN.$*(0(NU............. 65
6HrYo0oQLtor................................................. 66
0oGHO6HOHct.................................................... 67
0oGHOT\pH...................................................... 69

6\VtHm............................................................ 71)uQctLoQ.......................................................... 74
6ub-TrLm......................................................... 76
6HrYoRHYHrVH................................................. 77)aLO6afH........................................................... 78(QG3oLQt........................................................ 79
6HrYo6pHHG..................................................... 80
ThrottOHCut $Lr/+HOLoQO\ .......................... 81
IGOHDowQ $LroQO\ ...................................... 8
6waVhRLQJ +HOLoQO\ .................................. 83
6waVh +HOLoQO\H[cHpt+-1 ........................ 84
T1-T46HttLQJ.................................................. 87:arQLQJ........................................................... 88
THOHm.6Ht 6pHHch ......................................... 89
THOHmHtr\......................................................... 90
THOHmHtr\0oQLtor......................................... 91
THOHmHtr\:rHcHLYHr>battHr\@......................... 9
THOHmHtr\:rHcHLYHr>H[t-batt@......................... 93
THOHmHtr\:tHmpHraturH.................................. 94
THOHmHtr\:rpmVHQVor.................................... 95
THOHmHtr\:aOtLtuGH.......................................... 96
THOHmHtr\:aOtLtuGH>YarLomHtHr@.................... 97
THOHmHtr\:YoOtaJH>battHr\@........................... 98
THOHmHtr\:*36>GLVtaQcH@.............................. 99
THOHmHtr\:*36>VpHHG@................................ 101
THOHmHtr\:currHQt>currHQtYoOtaJHcapacLt\@.... 10
6HQVor............................................................ 103
6HQVor:rHOoaG................................................ 104
6HQVor:rHJLVtHr.............................................. 104
6HQVor:rHOocatH............................................. 105
6HQVor:VHtVOot............................................... 105
DataRHVHt..................................................... 106)UNCTION6O)0OD(/0(NU............... 107
ƔCommoQ)uQctLoQV...................................... 107
CoQGLtLoQ..................................................... 108
DuaORatH...................................................... 110
3roJram0L[................................................. 11)uHO0L[........................................................ 114

Ɣ$LrpOaQH/*OLGHr)uQctLoQV........................... 116
3LtCurYH....................................................... 118
T+RCurYH................................................... 119
T+RDHOa\.................................................... 10$I/DLffHrHQtLaO............................................ 11)Oap6HttLQJ................................................... 1
$I/toCambHr)/3..................................... 13$I/to%raNH)/3......................................... 14$I/toRUD................................................... 15
RUDto$I/................................................... 16
CambHr0L[.................................................. 18(/(toCambHr............................................ 130
CambHr)/3to(/(.................................... 131%uttHrÀ\........................................................ 13
TrLm0L[....................................................... 134$LrbraNH $LrpOaQHoQO\ ............................. 136*\ro for*<$t\pHJ\ro ............................ 138
9-taLO.............................................................. 140$LOHYator........................................................ 141:LQJOHt.......................................................... 14
0otor............................................................. 143
RUDto(/(.................................................. 145
6QapRoOO $LrpOaQHoQO\ ............................ 146
Ɣ+HOLcoptHr)uQctLoQV.................................... 148
3ITCurYH/3LttrLm....................................... 149
T+RCurYH/ThrottOHhoYHrtrLm................. 15
ThrottOH+oOG................................................ 155
6waVh0L[..................................................... 156
ThrottOH0L[.................................................. 157
3ITtoRUD RHYoOutLoQmL[ ..................... 158*\ro for*<t\pHJ\ro .............................. 159*oYHrQor....................................................... 16
ƔTLmHr.............................................................. 165
Ɣ6wLtch6HttLQJ................................................ 167
ƔUpGatLQJ........................................................ 170
ƔIQVtaOOLQJ6pHHchData.................................. 17

INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing a Futaba® FASSTest-2.4GHz* FX-22 series digital proportional R/C system.
This system is extremely versatile and may be used by beginners and pros alike. In order for you to make
WKHEHVWXVHRI\RXUV\VWHPDQGWRÀ\VDIHO\SOHDVHUHDGWKLVPDQXDOFDUHIXOO\,I\RXKDYHDQ\GLI¿FXOWLHVZKLOHXVLQJ\RXUV\VWHPSOHDVHFRQVXOWWKHPDQXDORXURQOLQH)UHTXHQWO\$VNHG4XHVWLRQV RQWKHZHESDJHVUHIHUHQFHGEHORZ \RXUKREE\GHDOHURUWKH)XWDED6HUYLFH&HQWHU
*FASSTest: Futaba Advanced Spread Spectrum Technology extend system telemetry'XHWRXQIRUHVHHQFKDQJHVLQSURGXFWLRQSURFHGXUHVWKHLQIRUPDWLRQFRQWDLQHGLQWKLVPDQXDOLVVXEMHFWWR
change without notice.
6XSSRUW DQG 6HUYLFH ,W LV UHFRPPHQGHG WR KDYH \RXU )XWDED HTXLSPHQW VHUYLFHG DQQXDOO\ GXULQJ \RXU
hobby’s “off season” to ensure safe operation.
INNORT+$0(RIC$
3OHDVH IHHO IUHH WR FRQWDFW WKH )XWDED 6HUYLFH &HQWHU IRU DVVLVWDQFH LQ RSHUDWLRQ XVH DQG SURJUDPPLQJ3OHDVH EH VXUH WR UHJXODUO\ YLVLW WKH ); )UHTXHQWO\$VNHG 4XHVWLRQV ZHE VLWH DW ZZZIXWDEDUFFRPIDT 7KLV SDJH LQFOXGHV H[WHQVLYH SURJUDPPLQJ XVH VHW XS DQG VDIHW\ LQIRUPDWLRQ RQ WKH ); UDGLR
system and is updated regularly. Any technical updates and US manual corrections will be available on this
ZHESDJH,I\RXGRQRW¿QGWKHDQVZHUVWR\RXUTXHVWLRQVWKHUHSOHDVHVHHWKHHQGRIRXU)$4DUHDIRU
information on contacting us via email for the most rapid and convenient response.
'RQ¶WKDYH,QWHUQHWDFFHVV",QWHUQHWDFFHVVLVDYDLODEOHDWQRFKDUJHDWPRVWSXEOLFOLEUDULHVVFKRROVDQG
RWKHUSXEOLFUHVRXUFHV:H¿QGLQWHUQHWVXSSRUWWREHDIDEXORXVUHIHUHQFHIRUPDQ\PRGHOHUVDVLWHPVFDQ
EHSULQWHGDQGVDYHGIRUIXWXUHUHIHUHQFHDQGFDQEHDFFHVVHGDWDQ\KRXURIWKHGD\QLJKWZHHNHQGRUKROLGD\,I\RXGRQRWZLVKWRDFFHVVWKHLQWHUQHWIRULQIRUPDWLRQKRZHYHUGRQ¶WZRUU\2XUVXSSRUWWHDPV
are available Monday through Friday 8-5 Central time to assist you.
)OR6(R9IC(ON/<:
Futaba Service Center1$SROOR'ULYH6XLWH
&KDPSDLJQ,/
3KRQH
www.futaba-rc.com/service.html
Email: service@futaba-rc.com)OR6U33ORT:
3RO*R$00IN*$NDU6(R4U(6TION6 
3OHDVHVWDUWKHUHIRUDQVZHUVWRPRVWTXHVWLRQVZZZIXWDEDUFFRPIDT)D[
3KRQHRSWLRQOUT6ID(NORT+$0(RIC$
3OHDVHFRQWDFW\RXU)XWDEDLPSRUWHULQ\RXUUHJLRQRIWKHZRUOGWRDVVLVW\RXZLWKDQ\TXHVWLRQVSUREOHPV
or service needs.
3OHDVHUHFRJQL]HWKDWDOOLQIRUPDWLRQLQWKLVPDQXDODQGDOOVXSSRUWDYDLODELOLW\LVEDVHGXSRQWKHV\VWHPV
sold in North America only. Products purchased elsewhere may vary. Always contact your region’s support
center for assistance.

4 <Introduction>

$ppOication([portand0odi¿cation
7KLVSURGXFWPD\EHXVHGIRUPRGHODLUSODQHRUVXUIDFH ERDWFDUURERW XVH,WLVQRWLQWHQGHGIRUXVH
in any application other than the control of models for hobby and recreational purposes. The product is
VXEMHFWWRUHJXODWLRQVRIWKH0LQLVWU\RI5DGLR7HOHFRPPXQLFDWLRQVDQGLVUHVWULFWHGXQGHU-DSDQHVHODZWR
such purposes.
2. Exportation precautions:
D :KHQWKLVSURGXFWLVH[SRUWHGIURPWKHFRXQWU\RIPDQXIDFWXUHLWVXVHLVWREHDSSURYHGE\WKHODZVJRYHUQLQJWKHFRXQWU\RIGHVWLQDWLRQZKLFKJRYHUQGHYLFHVWKDWHPLWUDGLRIUHTXHQFLHV,IWKLVSURGXFWLV
WKHQUHH[SRUWHGWRRWKHUFRXQWULHVLWPD\EHVXEMHFWWRUHVWULFWLRQVRQVXFKH[SRUW3ULRUDSSURYDORIWKH
DSSURSULDWHJRYHUQPHQWDXWKRULWLHVPD\EHUHTXLUHG,I\RXKDYHSXUFKDVHGWKLVSURGXFWIURPDQH[SRUWHURXWVLGH \RXU FRXQWU\ DQG QRW WKH DXWKRUL]HG )XWDED GLVWULEXWRU LQ \RXU FRXQWU\ SOHDVH FRQWDFW WKH VHOOHU
immediately to determine if such export regulations have been met.
E 8VHRIWKLVSURGXFWZLWKRWKHUWKDQPRGHOVPD\EHUHVWULFWHGE\([SRUWDQG7UDGH&RQWURO5HJXODWLRQV
DQGDQDSSOLFDWLRQIRUH[SRUWDSSURYDOPXVWEHVXEPLWWHG7KLVHTXLSPHQWPXVWQRWEHXWLOL]HGWRRSHUDWHHTXLSPHQWRWKHUWKDQUDGLRFRQWUROOHGPRGHOV 0RGLILFDWLRQ DGMXVWPHQW DQG UHSODFHPHQW RI SDUWV )XWDED LV QRW UHVSRQVLEOH IRU XQDXWKRUL]HGPRGLILFDWLRQ DGMXVWPHQW DQG UHSODFHPHQW RI SDUWV RQ WKLV SURGXFW$Q\ VXFK FKDQJHV PD\ YRLG WKH
warranty.
CompOiancHInformation6tatHmHnt forU.6.$.
7KLVGHYLFHWUDGHQDPH)XWDED&RUSRUDWLRQPRGHOQXPEHU56%FRPSOLHVZLWKSDUWRIWKH)&&
5XOHV2SHUDWLRQLVVXEMHFWWRWKHIROORZLQJWZRFRQGLWLRQV 7KLVGHYLFHPD\QRWFDXVHKDUPIXOLQWHUIHUHQFHDQG
  7KLV GHYLFH PXVW DFFHSW DQ\ LQWHUIHUHQFH UHFHLYHG LQFOXGLQJ LQWHUIHUHQFH WKDW PD\ FDXVH XQGHVLUHG
operation.
 7KLV PRGXOH PHHWV WKH UHTXLUHPHQWV IRU D PRELOH GHYLFH WKDW PD\ EH XVHG DW VHSDUDWLRQ GLVWDQFHV RI
more than 20cm from human body.
7R PHHW WKH 5) H[SRVXUH UHTXLUHPHQWV RI WKH )&& WKLV GHYLFH VKDOO QRW EH FRORFDWHG ZLWK DQRWKHU
transmitting device.
The responsible party of this device compliance is:Futaba Service Center1$SROOR'ULYH6XLWH&KDPSDLJQ,/86$
7(/  RU(PDLOVXSSRUW#IXWDEDUFFRP 6XSSRUW
7(/  RU(PDLOVHUYLFH#IXWDEDUFFRP 6HUYLFH 
7KH 5%5& 6($/ RQ WKH QLFNHOFDGPLXP EDWWHU\ FRQWDLQHG LQ )XWDED SURGXFWV LQGLFDWHV WKDWFutaba Corporation of America is voluntarily participating in an industry-wide program to collect
DQGUHF\FOHWKHVHEDWWHULHVDWWKHHQGRIWKHLUXVHIXOOLYHVZKHQWDNHQRXWRIVHUYLFHZLWKLQWKH
8QLWHG 6WDWHV7KH 5%5& SURJUDP SURYLGHV D FRQYHQLHQW DOWHUQDWLYH WR SODFLQJ XVHG QLFNHOFDGPLXPEDWWHULHVLQWRWKHWUDVKRUPXQLFLSDOZDVWHV\VWHPZKLFKLVLOOHJDOLQVRPHDUHDV.
 IRU86$ You may contact your local recycling center for information on where to return the spent battery. Please
FDOO %$77(5< IRU LQIRUPDWLRQ RQ 1L&G EDWWHU\ UHF\FOLQJ LQ \RXU DUHD )XWDED &RUSRUDWLRQ RI
America's involvement in this program is part of its commitment to protecting our environment andconserving natural resources.
5%5&LVDWUDGHPDUNRIWKH5HFKDUJHDEOH%DWWHU\5HF\FOLQJ&RUSRUDWLRQ<Introduction> 5)HdHraOCommunicationVCommiVVionIntHrfHrHncH6tatHmHnt forU.6.$.
7KLVHTXLSPHQWKDVEHHQWHVWHGDQGIRXQGWRFRPSO\ZLWKWKHOLPLWVIRUD&ODVV%GLJLWDOGHYLFHSXUVXDQW
WR3DUWRIWKH)&&5XOHV7KHVHOLPLWVDUHGHVLJQHGWRSURYLGHUHDVRQDEOHSURWHFWLRQDJDLQVWKDUPIXO
interference in a residential installation.
7KLV HTXLSPHQW JHQHUDWHV XVHV DQG FDQ UDGLDWH UDGLR IUHTXHQF\ HQHUJ\ DQG LI QRW LQVWDOOHG DQG XVHG LQ
DFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHLQVWUXFWLRQVPD\FDXVHKDUPIXOLQWHUIHUHQFHWRUDGLRFRPPXQLFDWLRQV+RZHYHUWKHUH
LV QR JXDUDQWHH WKDW LQWHUIHUHQFH ZLOO QRW RFFXU LQ D SDUWLFXODU LQVWDOODWLRQ ,I WKLV HTXLSPHQW GRHV FDXVHKDUPIXOLQWHUIHUHQFHWRUDGLRRUWHOHYLVLRQUHFHSWLRQZKLFKFDQEHGHWHUPLQHGE\WXUQLQJWKHHTXLSPHQWRII
DQGRQWKHXVHULVHQFRXUDJHGWRWU\WRFRUUHFWWKHLQWHUIHUHQFHE\RQHRUPRUHRIWKHIROORZLQJPHDVXUHV--Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
,QFUHDVHWKHVHSDUDWLRQEHWZHHQWKHHTXLSPHQWDQGUHFHLYHU
--Consult the dealer or your Futaba Serivce center for help.
C$UTION:To assure continued FCC compliance:$Q\FKDQJHVRUPRGL¿FDWLRQVQRWH[SUHVVO\DSSURYHGE\WKHJUDQWHHRIWKLVGHYLFHFRXOGYRLGWKHXVHU VDXWKRULW\WRRSHUDWHWKHHTXLSPHQW([poVurHtoRadio)rHquHnc\Radiation
7RFRPSO\ZLWK)&&5)H[SRVXUHFRPSOLDQFHUHTXLUHPHQWVDVHSDUDWLRQGLVWDQFHRIDWOHDVWFPPXVWEH
maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons.
7KLVGHYLFHPXVWQRWEHFRORFDWHGRURSHUDWLQJLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWKDQ\RWKHUDQWHQQDRUWUDQVPLWWHU
0HaninJof6pHciaO0arNinJV
Pay special attention to safety where indicated by the following marks:
D$N*(R3URFHGXUHVZKLFKPD\OHDGWRGDQJHURXVFRQGLWLRQVDQGFDXVHGHDWKVHULRXVLQMXU\LIQRW
carried out properly.
:$RNIN*3URFHGXUHVZKLFKPD\OHDGWRDGDQJHURXVFRQGLWLRQRUFDXVHGHDWKRUVHULRXVLQMXU\WR WKH XVHU LI QRW FDUULHG RXW SURSHUO\ RU SURFHGXUHV ZKHUH WKH SUREDELOLW\ RI VXSHU¿FLDO LQMXU\ RU
physical damage is high.
C$UTION  3URFHGXUHV ZKHUH WKH SRVVLELOLW\ RI VHULRXV LQMXU\ WR WKH XVHU LV VPDOO EXW WKHUH LV D
GDQJHURILQMXU\RUSK\VLFDOGDPDJHLIQRWFDUULHGRXWSURSHUO\= Prohibited= Mandatory:arninJ: Always keep electrical components away from small children.
)/<IN*6$)(T<:$RNIN*
7RHQVXUHWKHVDIHW\RI\RXUVHOIDQGRWKHUVSOHDVHREVHUYHWKHIROORZLQJSUHFDXWLRQV+aYH rHJuOar maintHnancH pHrformHd. Although your FX-22 protects the model memories withQRQYRODWLOH((3520PHPRU\ ZKLFKGRHVQRWUHTXLUHSHULRGLFUHSODFHPHQW DQGQRWDEDWWHU\WKH
transmitter still should have regular checkups for wear and tear. We recommend sending your system
WR WKH )XWDED 6HUYLFH &HQWHU DQQXDOO\ GXULQJ \RXU QRQÀ\LQJVHDVRQ IRU D FRPSOHWH FKHFNXS DQGservice.

6 <Introduction>

Ni0+/NiCd%attHr\
CharJHthHbattHriHV 6HH&KDUJLQJWKH1L&GEDWWHULHVIRUGHWDLOV $OZD\VUHFKDUJHWKHWUDQVPLWWHUDQGUHFHLYHUEDWWHULHVEHIRUHHDFKÀ\LQJVHVVLRQ$ORZEDWWHU\ZLOOVRRQGLHSRWHQWLDOO\FDXVLQJORVVRI FRQWURO DQG D FUDVK:KHQ \RX EHJLQ \RXU À\LQJ VHVVLRQ UHVHW \RXU );¶V EXLOWLQ WLPHU DQGduring the session pay attention to the duration of usage.
6topÀ\inJOonJbHforH\ourbattHriHVbHcomHOowoncharJH.DonotrHO\on\ourradio¶VOow
battHr\warninJV\VtHmVintHndHdonO\aVaprHcautiontotHOO\ouwhHntorHcharJH.$Owa\V
chHcN\ourtranVmittHrandrHcHiYHrbattHriHVpriortoHachÀiJht.
:hHrHto)O\
We recommend that you fly at a recognized model airplane flying field. You can find model clubs
DQG ILHOGV E\ DVNLQJ \RXU QHDUHVW KREE\ GHDOHU RU LQ WKH 86 E\ FRQWDFWLQJ WKH$FDGHP\ RI 0RGHOAeronautics.
<RXFDQDOVRFRQWDFWWKHQDWLRQDO$FDGHP\RI0RGHO$HURQDXWLFV $0$ ZKLFKKDVPRUHWKDQFKDUWHUHGFOXEVDFURVVWKHFRXQWU\7KURXJKDQ\RQHRIWKHPLQVWUXFWRUWUDLQLQJSURJUDPVDQGLQVXUHG
newcomer training are available. Contact the AMA at the address or toll-free phone number below.
$cadHm\of0odHO$HronauticV(DVW0HPRULDO'ULYH
0XQFLH,1
7HOH  
)D[  
or via the Internet at http:\\www.modelaircraft.org$Owa\V pa\ particuOar attHntion to thH À\inJ ¿HOd¶V ruOHV as well as the presence and location
RIVSHFWDWRUVWKHZLQGGLUHFWLRQDQGDQ\REVWDFOHVRQWKH¿HOG%HYHU\FDUHIXOÀ\LQJLQDUHDVQHDUSRZHU OLQHV WDOO EXLOGLQJV RU FRPPXQLFDWLRQ IDFLOLWLHV DV WKHUH PD\ EH UDGLR LQWHUIHUHQFH LQ WKHLU
vicinity.

<Introduction> 7

Ni0+/NiCd%attHr\6afHt\and+andOinJinVtructionV
I03ORT$NT
Use only the )utaba VpHciaO charJHr included with this set or other chargers approved by Futaba tocharge the NiMH batteries in the FX-22 transmitter included with this set.
It is important to understand the operating characteristics of NiMH/NiCd batteries.Always read the
VSHFL¿FDWLRQVSULQWHGRQWKHODEHORI\RXU1L0+1L&GEDWWHU\DQGFKDUJHUSULRUWRXVH)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKH SURFHHGLQJ SUHFDXWLRQV FDQ TXLFNO\ UHVXOW LQ VHYHUH SHUPDQHQW GDPDJH WR WKH EDWWHULHV DQG LWVsurroundings and possibly result in a )IR(I03ORT$NT3R(C$UTION6
Do not attempt to disassemble NiMH/NiCd packs or cells.
Do not allow NiMH/NiCd cells to come in contact with moisture or water at any time.
$OZD\VSURYLGHDGHTXDWHYHQWLODWLRQDURXQG1L0+1L&GEDWWHULHVGXULQJFKDUJHGLVFKDUJHZKLOHLQ
XVHDQGGXULQJVWRUDJH
Do not leave a NiMH/NiCd battery unattended at any time while being charged or discharged.
'RQRWDWWHPSWWRFKDUJH1L0+1L&GEDWWHULHVZLWKDFKDUJHUWKDWLV127GHVLJQHGIRU1L0+1L&G
EDWWHULHVDVSHUPDQHQWGDPDJHWRWKHEDWWHU\DQGFKDUJHUFRXOGUHVXOW$OZD\VFKDUJH1L0+1L&GEDWWHULHVLQD¿UHSURRIORFDWLRQ'RQRWFKDUJHRUGLVFKDUJH1L0+1L&G
EDWWHULHVRQFDUSHWDFOXWWHUHGZRUNEHQFKQHDUSDSHUSODVWLFYLQ\OOHDWKHURUZRRGRULQVLGHDQ5&PRGHORUIXOOVL]HGDXWRPRELOH0RQLWRUWKHFKDUJHDUHDZLWKDVPRNHRU¿UHDODUP
'R QRW FKDUJH 1L0+1L&G EDWWHULHV DW FXUUHQWV JUHDWHU WKDQ WKH ³&´ UDWLQJ RI WKH EDWWHU\ ³&´
HTXDOVWKHUDWHGFDSDFLW\RIWKHEDWWHU\ 'RQRWDOORZ1L0+1L&GFHOOVWRRYHUKHDWDWDQ\WLPH&HOOVZKLFKUHDFKJUHDWHUWKDQGHJUHHV)DKUHQKHLW & VKRXOGEHSODFHGLQD¿UHSURRIORFDWLRQ
NiMH/NiCd cells will not charge fully when too cold or show full charge.
,WLVQRUPDOIRUWKHEDWWHULHVWREHFRPHZDUPGXULQJFKDUJLQJEXWLIWKHFKDUJHURUEDWWHU\EHFRPHV
excessively hot disconnect the battery from the charger immediately!! Always inspect a battery which
KDVSUHYLRXVO\RYHUKHDWHGIRUSRWHQWLDOGDPDJHDQGGRQRWUHXVHLI\RXVXVSHFWLWKDVEHHQGDPDJHG
in any way.
Do not use a NiMH/NiCd battery if you suspect physical damage has occurred to the pack. Carefully
LQVSHFWWKHEDWWHU\IRUHYHQWKHVPDOOHVWRIGHQWVFUDFNVVSOLWVSXQFWXUHVRUGDPDJHWRWKHZLULQJDQGFRQQHFWRUV'2127DOORZWKHEDWWHU\¶VLQWHUQDOHOHFWURO\WHWRJHWLQWRH\HVRURQVNLQ²ZDVKDIIHFWHGDUHDVLPPHGLDWHO\LIWKH\FRPHLQFRQWDFWZLWKWKHHOHFWURO\WH,ILQGRXEWSODFHWKHEDWWHU\
LQD¿UHSURRIORFDWLRQIRUDWOHDVWPLQXWHV'RQRWVWRUHEDWWHULHVQHDUDQRSHQÀDPHRUKHDWHU
Do not discharge NiMH/NiCd batteries at currents which exceed the discharge current rating of thebattery.
Always store NiMH/NiCd cells/packs in a secure location away from children.
6HcurHDiJitaO 6D 0Hmor\Card+andOinJInVtructionV
6DcardiVnotincOudHdwiththiVVHt
Never remove the SD card or turn off power
while entering data.
Never store the SD card where it may be
VXEMHFW WR VWURQJ VWDWLF HOHFWULFLW\ RU PDJQHWLF
¿HOGV
'R QRW H[SRVH WKH 6' FDUG WR GLUHFW VXQOLJKW
excessive humidity or corrosive environments.

8 <Introduction>'R QRW H[SRVH WKH 6' FDUG WR GLUW PRLVWXUHZDWHURUÀXLGVRIDQ\NLQG
Always hold the SD card by the edges during
installation and removal.
%H FHUWDLQ WR LQVHUW WKH 6' FDUG LQ WKH FRUUHFW
direction.

$tthHÀ\inJ¿HOd
7R SUHYHQW SRVVLEOH GDPDJH WR \RXU UDGLR JHDU WXUQ WKH SRZHU VZLWFKHV RQ DQG RII LQ WKH SURSHUVHTXHQFH
3XOOWKURWWOHVWLFNWRLGOHSRVLWLRQRURWKHUZLVHGLVDUP\RXUPRWRUHQJLQH
2. Turn on the transmitter power and allow your transmitter to reach its home screen.
&RQ¿UPWKHSURSHUPRGHOPHPRU\KDVEHHQVHOHFWHG
4. Turn on your receiver power.
7HVWDOOFRQWUROV,IDVHUYRRSHUDWHVDEQRUPDOO\GRQ¶WDWWHPSWWRÀ\XQWLO\RXGHWHUPLQHWKHFDXVHRI
the problem.
 7HVWWRHQVXUHWKDWWKH)DLO6DIHVHWWLQJVDUHFRUUHFWDIWHUDGMXVWLQJWKHP7XUQWKHWUDQVPLWWHURIIDQG
FRQ¿UPWKHSURSHUVXUIDFHWKURWWOHPRYHPHQWV7XUQWKHWUDQVPLWWHUEDFNRQ
6WDUW\RXUHQJLQH
&RPSOHWHDIXOOUDQJHFKHFN$IWHU À\LQJ EULQJ \RXU WKURWWOH VWLFN WR LGOH SRVLWLRQ HQJDJH DQ\ NLOO VZLWFKHV RU RWKHUZLVH GLVDUP
your motor/engine.
7XUQRIIUHFHLYHUSRZHU
7XUQRIIWUDQVPLWWHUSRZHU
,I \RX GR QRW WXUQ RQ \RXU V\VWHP LQ WKLV RUGHU \RX PD\ GDPDJH \RXU VHUYRV RU FRQWURO VXUIDFHVIORRG \RXU HQJLQH RU LQ WKH FDVH RI HOHFWULFSRZHUHG RU JDVROLQHSRZHUHG PRGHOV WKH HQJLQH PD\
XQH[SHFWHGO\WXUQRQDQGFDXVHDVHYHUHLQMXU\:hiOH\ouarHJHttinJrHad\toÀ\if\oupOacH\ourtranVmittHronthHJroundbHVurHthatthH
windwon ttipitoYHr.IfitiVNnocNHdoYHrWKHWKURWWOHVWLFNPD\EHDFFLGHQWDOO\PRYHGFDXVLQJ
WKHHQJLQHWRVSHHGXS$OVRGDPDJHWR\RXUWUDQVPLWWHUPD\RFFXU
In order to maintain complete control of your aircraft it is important that it rHmainV YiVibOH at aOOtimHV)O\LQJEHKLQGODUJHREMHFWVVXFKDVEXLOGLQJVJUDLQELQVHWFLVQRWVXJJHVWHG'RLQJVRPD\UHVXOWLQWKHUHGXFWLRQRIWKHTXDOLW\RIWKHUDGLRIUHTXHQF\OLQNWRWKHPRGHODo not JraVp thH tranVmittHr V antHnna durinJ ÀiJht. 'RLQJ VR PD\ GHJUDGH WKH TXDOLW\ RI WKHUDGLRIUHTXHQF\WUDQVPLVVLRQ$VZLWKDOOUDGLRIUHTXHQF\WUDQVPLVVLRQVWKHVWURQJHVWDUHDRIVLJQDOWUDQVPLVVLRQLVIURPWKHVLGHVRIWKHWUDQVPLWWHU VDQWHQQD$VVXFKWKHDQWHQQDVKRXOGQRWEHSRLQWHGGLUHFWO\DWWKHPRGHO,I\RXU
À\LQJVW\OHFUHDWHVWKLVVLWXDWLRQHDVLO\PRYHWKHDQWHQQDWRFRUUHFWWKLVVLWXDWLRQDon¶t fO\ in thH rain Water or moisture may enter the transmitter through the antenna or stick
openings and cause erratic operation or loss of control. If you must fly in wet weather during a
FRQWHVW EH VXUH WR FRYHU \RXU WUDQVPLWWHU ZLWK D SODVWLF EDJ RU ZDWHUSURRI EDUULHU 1HYHU IO\ LI
lightning is expected.

<Introduction> 9

BEFORE USE
Features
FASSTest system
The FX-22 transmitter has adopted the newly developed bidirectional communication system "FASSTest".
Data from the receiver can be checked in your transmitter. FASSTest is a maximum 14channels (linear 12channels + switch 2 channels) 2.4GHz dedicated system.
S.BUS2 system
By using the S.BUS2 system multiple servos, gyros and telemetry sensors are easily installed with aminimum amount of cables.
Model types
6 swash types are available for helicopters. 6 types of main wings and 3 types of tail wings are available
for airplanes and gliders. Functions and mixing functions necessary for each model type are set in advance at
the factory.
NiMH battery
FX-22 is operated by a 7.2V/1800 mAh battery.
SD card (Secure Digital memory card) (Not included)
Model data can be saved to an SD card (SD:32MB-2GB SDHC:4GB-32GB). When FX-22 transmitter
VRIWZDUH¿OHVDUHUHOHDVHGWKHVRIWZDUHFDQEHXSGDWHGE\XVLQJDQ6'FDUGXSGDWH
Data input
Large graphic LCD and Touch Sensor substantially improve ease of setup.
Edit button
Two edit buttons are provided, and the operating screen can be immediately “Returned” to the HOME
screen during operation. Setting operation can be performed easily by combining this button with a touch
sensor.
Vibration function
Selects a function that alerts the operator to various alarms by vibrating the transmitter in addition tosounding a buzzer.

10 <Before Use>Contents and Technical Speci¿cations
6SHFL¿FDWLRQVDQGUDWLQJVDUHVXEMHFWWRFKDQJHZLWKRXWQRWLFH

Your FX-22 includes the following components:
FX-22 2.4 GHz FASSTest® transmitter
NiMH transmitter battery, 7.2 V / 1800 mAh
FASSTest®-R7008SB 2.4 GHz receiver
Switch harness with charge socket
HBC-2C(4) battery charger

Transmitter FX-22(2-stick, 14-channel, FASSTest-2.4G system)
Transmitting frequency: 2.4GHz band
System: FASSTest14CH, FASSTest12CH, FASST MULT, FASST 7CH, S-FHSS, switchable
Power supply: 7.2V / 1800mAh NiMH battery

Receiver R7008SB(FASSTest-2.4G system, dual antenna diversity, S.BUS/S.BUS2 system)
Power requirement: 3.7V~7.2V battery or regulated output from ESC, etc. (*1)
Size: 0.98 x 1.86 x 0.56 in. (24.9 x 47.3 x 14.3 mm)
Weight: 0.38 oz. (10.9g)(*1) When using ESC's make sure that the regulated output capacity meets your usage application.

Note: The battery in the FX-22 transmitter is not connected to the battery
connector at initial. Please connect the battery connector before use.

<Before Use> 11

The following additional accessories are available from your dealer. Refer to a Futaba catalog for more
information:• HT6F1800B Transmitter battery pack - the (1800mAh) transmitter NiMH battery pack may be easily
H[FKDQJHGZLWKDIUHVKRQHWRSURYLGHHQRXJKFDSDFLW\IRUH[WHQGHGÀ\LQJVHVVLRQV
7UDLQHUFRUGWKHRSWLRQDOWUDLQLQJFRUGPD\EHXVHGWRKHOSDEHJLQQLQJSLORWOHDUQWRÀ\HDVLO\E\SODFLQJ
the instructor on a separate transmitter. Note that the FX-22 transmitter may be connected to another FX-22
system, as well as to any other models of Futaba transmitters. The FX-22 transmitter uses one of the three
cord plug types according to the transmitter connected. (Refer to the description at the TRAINER function
instructions).
• Servos - there are various kinds of servos. Please choose from the servos of Futaba what suited the modeland the purpose of using you. If you utilize a S.BUS system, you should choose a S.BUS servo. An analog
servo cannot be used if "FASSTest12CH mode" is used.
• Telemetry sensor - please purchase an optional sensor, in order to utilize bidirectional communication
system and to acquire the information from a model high up in the sky.
[Temperature sensor : SBS-01T] [Altitude sensor : SBS-01A] [RPM sensor magnet type : SBS-01RM][RPM sensor optical type : SBS-01RO] [GPS sensor : SBS-01G] [Voltage sensor : SBS-01V]• Y-harnesses, servo extensions, hub,etc - Genuine Futaba extensions and Y-harnesses, including a heavyduty version with heavier wire, are available to aid in your larger model and other installations.
• Gyros - a variety of genuine Futaba gyros is available for your aircraft or helicopter needs.
*RYHUQRUIRUKHOLFRSWHUXVH$XWRPDWLFDOO\DGMXVWVWKURWWOHVHUYRSRVLWLRQWRPDLQWDLQDFRQVWDQWKHDG
speed regardless of blade pitch, load, weather, etc.
• Receivers - various models of Futaba receivers may be purchased for use in other models. (Receivers for
FASSTest and FASST,S-FHSS types are available.)• Optional Charger - Futaba CR-2000 NiMH/NiCd Transmitter/Receiver Battery Charger.

12 <Before Use>

Transmitter controls●Antenna●Monitor LED●Switch(SA,SB,SE)●Volume(LD,RD)●Switch(SD,SG,SH)●LinearSlider(RS)●LinearSlider(LS)●Stick●Stick
(J2)

(J3)
(J4)

(J1)

●RotaryTrim(T3,T4)●RotaryTrim(T1,T2)●U.menu/Mon
ࠉButton●Home/Exit
Button●SensorTouchTM(SYS,LINK,
MDL,RTN,S1)●Power Switch●LCD<Before Use> 13

Transmitter's Antenna:
As with all radio frequency transmissions, thestrongest area of signal transmission is from thesides of the transmitter's antenna. As such, theantenna should not be pointed directly at the model.
If your flying style creates this situation, easily
move the antenna to correct this situation.
•Rotating antenna
The antenna can be rotated 90 degrees and angled
90 degrees. Forcing the antenna further than thiscan damage it. The antenna is not removable.

CAUTION
Please do not grasp the transmitter's
antenna during Àight.
Doing so may degrade the quality of the RFtransmission to the model

Do not carry the transmitter by theantenna.
There is the danger that the antenna wire will breakand operation will become impossible.

Do not pull the antenna forcefully.

90°

There is the danger that the antenna wire will breakand operation will become impossible.

90°

Low power
High power

High power
Monitor LED display
The status of the transmitter is displayed by LED
at the upper part of the front of a FX-22.
LED (Left)
Displays the "non-default condition" warning.

If you have a transmitterat an angle of a figure, anantenna will be good to use
it, bending 90 degrees.
It is not good forthere to be a modelon flight in the
direction tip of anantenna.

14 <Before Use>

• Blinking
Power switch is turned on when any condition
switch is activated (in the ON state).

LED (Right)
Displays the state of radio frequency
transmission.
• Off
Radio waves are in the OFF state.
• On
Radio waves are being transmitted.
• Blinking
Range check mode.

Switch (SA-SH)

Linear Slider LS,RS(Switch Type)• SA : 3 positions; Alternate; Short lever• SB : 3 positions; Alternate; Short lever• SD : 3 positions; Alternate; Long lever• SE : 2 positions; Alternate; Long lever• SG : 3 positions; Alternate; Short lever• SH : 3 positions; Alternate; Short lever

LS

RS*You can choose switch and set the ON/OFF-direction in thesetting screen of the mixing functions.

Rotary Trims

The linear slider LS and RS offer analog input.
*The FX-32 transmitter beeps when the lever comes to thecenter.

T3*You can select a linear slider and set the movement direction
on the setting screen of mixing functions.

T2

T4

T1

Home/Exit and U.menu/Mon. Button

Rotary Trims T1, T2, T3 and T4:
This transmitter is equipped with four (4) rotary
trims. Each time you press a trim button, the trim
position moves one step. If you continue pressing it,
the trim position starts to move faster. In addition,
when the trim position returns to the center, thetone will change. You can always monitor trim
positions by referencing the LCD screen.

Home/Exit
ButtonU.menu/Mon
Button*You can select the trim step amount and the display unit
on the home screen on the T1-T4 setting screen within thelinkage menu.
Note: The trim positions you have set will be stored in the
non-volatile memory and will remain there.

VolumeLD

RD

Volume LD and RD:
The volume LD and RD knobs allow analog
input.

Home/Exit:
Press

Return to the previous
screenPress and hold(Except HOME)

Return to the Home
screenIt pushes from HOME
screen.

To TELEMETRY display

Press and hold fromHOME screen.

Key lock/Lock releaseU.menu/Mon:Press

To Servo Monitor display

Press and holdTo User Menu display*The FX-22 transmitter beeps when the volume knob reaches
the center position.
*You can use each setting screen of the mixing functions to
VHOHFWYROXPHVDQGGH¿QHWKHGLUHFWLRQRIDPRYHPHQW

<Before Use> 15

Touch sensor operation
Data input operation is performed using the touch sensor.
SensorTouch™ operation• Short 'tap'

Condition

Working

If the screen has more than one page.

S1

The cursor moves to the top of next page.

If the screen have only one (1) page.

The cursor moves to the top of page.

If the input data mode with blinking the setting data.

The input data is canceled.

At the moving cursor mode.

Change to the input data mode.

At the input data mode.

Change to the moving cursor mode.

At the input data mode with blinking the setting data.

The data is entered.

SYS

At all screens

Jump to System Menu screen directly.

LNK

At all screens

Jump to Linkage Menu screen directly.

MDL

At all screens

Jump to Model Menu screen directly.

S1

At the HOME screen

Key lock On or Off

RTN

At the input data mode without blinking the setting
Reset to the initialized value.
data.

RTN
• Two short 'taps'• Touch and hold forone (1) second.

• Scrolling
Lightly circling the outside edge of the RTN button.

The cursor moves accordingly.

During the data input mode.

Increases or decreases values accordingly.

Outlineof“RTN”

Movement of cursor, value input or mode selection:

S1 button:

Movement of the cursor on the menu screen andmovement of the cursor among items on a setup
screen can be controlled by scrolling your finger
to the left and right in the direction of the arrow inthe scrolling diagram above. You can also go to thenext page, if there is a next page.
This scrolling technique is also used for data
input, value input, mode selection, and similar
operations. Examples include: Value, ON, OFF,
INH, ACT, etc.

When there is a next page on a menu screen or
setup screen, you can go to that page by touching
the S1 button. In this case, the cursor moves to thescreen title item of the page.

RTN button:
Touch the RTN button when you want to open
a setup screen or to switch between cursor movemode (reverse display) and data input mode (boxdisplay).
This button can also be used as the enter button
when a confirmation message is displayed on thescreen, etc.

16 <Before Use>

Exiting setup screen:
To end the operation on a setup screen and returnto the menu screen, move the cursor to the screen
title item and touch the RTN button.
To return to home screen directly, touch theHome/Exit button for 1 second.
Alternatively, move the cursor to the screen title
item and touch the RTN button to return to thehome screen from a menu screen.

Note:
6FUROORSHUDWLRQ&LUFOH\RXU¿QJHURQWKHRXWVLGHHGJHRI
the RTN button. The sensors may mis-read your touch as areverse rotation if the circle is smaller, or performed on theinside edge of the RTN button.

1. Hold the lever head "B" and turn the leverhead "A" counter-clockwise. The lock will be
released.
2. Turn the lever-head "A" clockwise as you holdthe lever-head "B" after placing it as you like.

Adjustment of stick lever tension
The tension of the self-return type stick lever can
EHDGMXVWHG

* The SensorTouch™ may not operate smoothly if your handis touching the surrounding case parts. As such, please
PDNHVXUHWKDWWKHWLSRI\RXU¿QJHULVDFWXDOO\RSHUDWLQJWKH
SensorTouch™.

1. Like next explanation, the rear case of atransmitter is removed and battery connection
also removes it.
Now you'll see the view shown in the figure
below.

•Stick Tension (J2)
(Mode 2)

•Stick Tension (J4)
(Mode 1/2)

•Stick Tension (J1)
(Mode 1/2)
*If the SensorTouch™ does not register your input, please
WU\DJDLQDIWHUOLJKWO\WDSSLQJ\RXU¿QJHURQWKHVHQVRURQFH
again.
* Do not operate the SensorTouch™ with gloves worn. The
SensorTouch™ might not react.

•Stick Tension (J3)
(Mode 1)

2. Use a cross slot screwdriver to adjust the spring
strength as you prefer by turning the adjustingscrew of the stick you want to adjust.
*Turning the screw clockwise increases the tension.

CAUTION: If you loosen the screw too much,the stick may not operate because it iscaught internally.

CAUTION
The touch sensor might not operate byreceiving the spark noise generated fromthe gasoline engine etc. In this case, please
operate your transmitter from the noise
source apart.
Stick Adjustment+ screw is clockwise.

+ screw is counter-clockwise.

Stick tension maximum

Stick tension minimum

Adjustment of the stick lever length<RXFDQDGMXVWWKHOHQJWKRIVWLFNOHYHUVDV\RX
OLNH,WLVUHFRPPHQGHGWRDGMXVWWKHOHQJWKRIWKH
sticks in line with your hand size.
Lever HeadA

Lever HeadB

A screw is kept
from coming out
from a line.

*The screw will touch the case.
3. At the end of adjustment, re-install the rearcase.

<Before Use> 17

SD Card (secure digital memory card) (notincluded)

Inserting/removing the SD card

The FX-22 transmitter model data can be stored
by using any commonly found SD card. When
FX-22 transmitter update software is released, thesoftware is updated using an SD card. The FX-22
is capable of using SD cards with a memory size
between 32MB and 2GB.

① A side cover is opened.

CAUTIONSD card slot

Be sure to turn off the power to thetransmitter before inserting or removing
the SD card.
As the SD card is a precision device, do notuse excessive force when inserting.

SD card reader/writer
Saving model data and update files (released
from Futaba) into the SD card, you can use thosefiles on your FX-22 transmitter. Equipment forreading and writing SD cards is available at mostelectronics stores.
Stored data
When you have a problem of saving or reading
data after a long period of use, please get a new SD
card.
*We do not have the responsibility of compensating any
failure or damage to the data stored in the memory card nomatter what the reason is. Be sure to keep a backup of yourimportant data in your SD card.

18 <Before Use>

*Don't mistake the*Dobboth sides/ thedirection of
SD card.

② It inserts untill it locks
l k SD cardd into SD card slot.
*It is releasable if a card is pushed once again.

How to remove a rear case:$UHDUFDVHLVUHPRYHGZKHQSHUIRUPLQJEDWWHU\H[FKDQJHVWLFNWHQVLRQDGMXVWPHQWDQGVZLWFKH[FKDQJH
Take care not to break an internal electronic board, wiring, and parts.

① "OPEN" of a slider is pushed.

② It slides in the directionof an arrow.

Slider*When a slider is raised, it is the structure which
an internal stopper releases

Stopper

Release Release

Release* When shutting a case, a slider is lowered
and a stopper is locked.
Lock

Lock

Lock

③ A rear case is removed
moved inthe direction of an arrow.

* When shutting a case, it
attaches from a lower pawl.

Rear case<Before Use> 19

Installation and removal of the transmitter
battery

Connector/Plug

Attachment of the battery
1. Open the rear case.

① Side cover is opened.

Band
Connector② Side cover is stuﬀed
into inside.

TrainerConnector
HT6F1800B

Battery
S.BUS (S.I/F)
Connector

Earphone
Plug

ChargePlugConnector for trainer function
When you use the trainer function, connect theoptional trainer cable between the transmitters forteacher and student.
*You can set the trainer function on the Trainer Function
screen in the System menu.

S.BUS connector (S.I/F)
When setting an S.BUS servo and telemetry
sensor, connect them both here.
(Supply power by 3-way hub or 2-way cord.)
Earphone plug
Connecting a stereo headphone to this plug, thespeech information of telemetry can be heard.

Connector

2. A battery is Àxed using two bands.
3. Connect the battery connector.
4. Close the rear case completely.

Battery removal
Note: If you remove the battery while thepower is on, the data you have set will not
be saved.
1. Open the rear case.
2. Disconnect the battery connector.
3. Two bands are removed and the remove thebattery.
4. Close the rear case completely.

Connector for battery charger
This is the connector for charging the NiMH
battery 7,2V/ 1,800mAH that is installed in thetransmitter. Do not use any other chargers except
the attached special charger.

WARNING
Do not connect any other chargers except the
special charger to this charging connector.

20 <Before Use>WARNINGBe careful not to drop the battery.
Never disconnect the battery connector from the
FX-22 transmitter after turning off the power
until the screen is completely blank and thetransmitter has shut down completely.
* Internal devices such as memories may be damaged.
* If there is any problem, the message "Backup Error" will
be shown the next time when you turn on the power of thetransmitter. Do not use the transmitter as it is. Send it to the
Futaba service center.

When a tray is attached

Transmitter tray

3x10mm Screw(Hex.)
Tray Board(Right)Tray Board(Left)
Tray Base C(x4)

Shaft C (Right)

Shaft B
Shaft AR!
(Fig.1)

Shaft C (Left)
2.5mm

2.5x8mmScrew
Washer

L!

(Back Case)

Tray Base B(x4)

1. Before assembly, take a back case off.
2. Make a hole in back case. (See FIG.1)

Tray Base A(x4)
2.5x10mm Screw(Hex.)<Before Use> 21

Receiver nomenclature
Before using the receiver, be sure to read theprecautions listed in the following pages.
Receiver R7008SB

DANGER
Don't connect a connector, as shown in a
before ¿gure.
*It will short-circuit, if it connected in this way. A shortcircuit across the battery terminals may cause abnormal
KHDWLQJ¿UHDQGEXUQVWARNING
S.BUS2 connectors
Don't connect an S.BUS servo / gyro to
S.BUS2 connector.
Connector"1 through 6": outputs for the channels 1
through 6"7/B": outputs of 7 channels and power.
"8/SB": outputs of 8 channels or S.BUS port.
[S.BUS Servo S.BUS Gyro ]*When using 8/SB as S.BUS, you have to set
CH MODE of the following page to mode B ormode D.
"S.BUS2": outputs of S.BUS2 port.
[S.BUS2 Servo S.BUS2 Gyro Telemetry Sensor ]*When using 9 or more channels, use an S.BUS
function or use a second R7008SB and link bothto your transmitter.

LED Monitor
This monitor is used to check the CH mode of
the receiver.

Link/Mode Switch
Use the small plastic screw driver that was
included with your receiver.
The Link/Mode Switch is also used for the CH
mode selection.

Connector insertion
Firmly insert the connector in the direction
VKRZQLQWKH¿JXUH,QVHUWWKH6%86E\WXUQLQJ
it 90 degrees.

−

DangerExtra Voltage Connector

5HFHLYHU

Use this connector when using a voltage
telemetry device to send the battery voltage (DC0~ 70V) from the receiver to the transmitter.
You will need to purchase the optional
External Voltage input cable (CA-RVIN-700) .
You can then make a cable with an extra
connector to the External Voltage connector.

Do not connect either a switch
or battery in this manner.

22 <Before Use>＋DANGER[How to change the R7008SB Channel mode.]
1. Press and hold down the Link/Mode buttonon the R7008SB receiver.
2. Turn the receiver on while holding down
the Link/Mode button. when the LED
begins to blink green/red the button may
be released.
3. The LED should now be blinking red in oneof the patterns described by the chart
below.
4. Each press of the Mode/Link button
advances the receiver to the next mode.
5. When you reach the mode that you wish
to operate in, press and hold the Mode/
Link button for more than 2 seconds.
6. Once locked into the correct mode the
LED will change to a solid color.
7. Please cycle the receiver(s) power off andback on again after changing the Channel
Mode.

Don't touch wiring.
* There is a danger of receiving an electric shock.

Do not short-circuit the battery terminals.
* A short circuit across the battery terminals may cause
DEQRUPDOKHDWLQJ¿UHDQGEXUQVPlease double check your polarity ( ＋ and− ) when hooking up your connectors.
* If ＋ and − of wiring are mistaken, it will damage,ignite and explode.

Don’t connection to Extra Voltage before
turning on a receiver power supply.
R7008SB CH Mode
The R7008SB receiver is a very versatile
unit. It has 8 PWM outputs, S.BUS and S.BUS2
outputs. Additionally the PWM outputs can bechanged from channels 1-8 to channels 9-12 If
you only desire to use it as an 8 channel receiver(without S.BUS), it can be used without any
setting changes.
The FX-22 has the ability to link to two
R7008SB receivers. One of them outputting
channels 1-8 and the other outputting channels
9-12 giving you 12 PWM channels. Instructions
for this configuration and S.BUS operation
follow.

R7008SB CH MODE TABLE
Setting channel

Receiver connector

Mode A
1 〜 8CH

Mode B
1 〜 7CH

Mode C
9 〜 12CH

Mode D
9 〜 12CH

1

1

1

9

9

2

2

2

10

10

3

3

3

11

11

4

4

4

12

12

5

5

5

-

-

6

6

6

-

-

7/B

7

7

-

-

8/SB

8

S.BUS

-

S.BUS

Red LED blink

1time

2time

3time

4time
<Before Use> 23

Receiver's Antenna Installation
The R7008SB has two antennas. In order to maximize signal reception and promote safe modeling Futaba
has adopted a diversity antenna system. This allows the receiver to obtain RF signals on both antennas andÀ\SUREOHPIUHH
*Must be kept as straight as possible.

Antenna

Coaxial cable
R7008SB Receiver

To obtain the best results of the diversity
function, please refer to the following
instructions:
1. The two antennas must be kept as straightas possible. Otherwise it will reduce theeffective range.
2. The two antennas should be placed at 90
degrees to each other.

AntennaThis is not a critical figure, but the mostimportant thing is to keep the antennas
away from each other as much as possible.
Larger models can have large metal
objects that can attenuate the RF signal. In
this case the antennas should be placedat both sides of the model. Then the best
RF signal condition is obtained at any Áying
attitude.
3. The antennas must be kept away fromconductive materials, such as metal,
carbon and fuel tank by at least a halfinch. The coaxial part of the antennas does
not need to follow these guidelines, but do
not bend it in a tight radius.
4. Keep the antennas away from the motor,
ESC, and other noise sources as much as
possible.

Antenna*The two antennas should be placed at 90 degrees to each other.
*The illustration demonstrates how the antenna should be placed.
*Receiver Vibration and Waterproofing: The receiver contains precision electronic parts. Be sure to avoid vibration,
shock, and temperature extremes. For protection, wrap the receiver in foam rubber or other vibration-absorbing
materials. It is also a good idea to waterproof the receiver by placing it in a plastic bag and securing the open end of the
bag with a rubber band before wrapping it with foam rubber. If you accidentally get moisture or fuel inside the receiver,
you may experience intermittent operation or a crash. If in doubt, return the receiver to our service center for service.

24 <Before Use>

Safety precautions when you installreceiver and servos

Mounting the Servo

Wood screw

2.3-2.6mm nut
washerRubbergrommetBrass eyelet

RubbergrommetBrass eyelet

WARNING
Connecting connectors

Servo mount
Servo mount2.3-2.6mm screw(Airplane/Glider)(Helicopter)

Servo lead wires
To prevent the servo lead cable from being
broken by vibration during flight, provide alittle slack in the cable and fasten it at suitable
points. Periodically check the cable during daily
maintenance.

Be sure to insert the connector until it
stops at the deepest point.
How to protect the receiver from vibration
and water
Wrap the receiver with something soft
such as foam rubber to avoid vibration.
If there is a chance of getting wet, put thereceiver in a waterproof bag or balloon to
avoid water.
Receiver's antenna
Never cut the receiver's antenna. Do notbind the receiver's antenna with the cables
for servos.

Margin in the lead wire.

Fasten about 5-10cm
from the servo outlet sothat the lead wire is neat.

Mounting the power switch
When mounting a power switch to an airframe,
make a rectangular hole that is a little larger than
the total stroke of the switch so that you can turnthe switch ON/OFF without binding.
Avoid mounting the switch where it can becovered by engine oil and dust. In general, it isrecommended to mount the power switch on the
VLGHRIWKHIXVHODJHWKDWLVRSSRVLWHWKHPXIÀHU

Locate the receiver's antenna as far as
possible from metals or carbon fiber
components such as frames, cables, etc.
*Cutting or binding the receiver's antenna will reduce theradio reception sensitivity and range, and may cause acrash.

Servo throw
Adjust your system so that pushrods will
not bind or sag when operating the servos
to the full extent.
*If excessive force is continuously applied to a servo, theservo could be damaged due to force on the gear train
and/or power consumption causing rapid battery drain.

Mounting servos
Use a vibration-proof rubber (such as
rubber grommet) under a servo when
mounting the servo on a servo mount. And
be sure that the servo cases do not touchdirectly to the metal parts such as servo
mount.
*If the servo case contacts the airframe directly, vibration
will travel to and possibly damage the servo.

<Before Use> 25

S.BUS/S.BUS2 Installation
7KLVVHWXVHVWKH6%866%86V\VWHP7KHZLULQJLVDVVLPSOL¿HGDQGFOHDQPRXQWLQJDVSRVVLEOHHYHQ
with models that use a large number of servos. In addition, the wings can be quickly installed to the fuselage
without any erroneous wiring by the use of only one simple wire, even when there are a large number ofservos used.
Ɣ:KHQXVLQJ6%866%86VSHFLDOVHWWLQJVDQGPL[HVLQ\RXUWUDQVPLWWHUPD\EHXQQHFHVVDU\Ɣ7KH6%866%86VHUYRVPHPRUL]HWKHQXPEHURIFKDQQHOVWKHPVHOYHV VHWWDEOHZLWKWKH);
Ɣ7KH6%866%86V\VWHPDQGFRQYHQWLRQDOV\VWHP UHFHLYHUFRQYHQWLRQDO&+XVHG FDQEHPL[HG
S.BUS

Glider usage example
Receiver: R7008SB
Servo: S3172SV×9 ( Optional )HUB×4 ( Optional )Throttle servo: BLS173SV ( Optional )Battery: FR2F1800 ( Optional )S.BUS Aerobatic plane usage example

Switch: HSW-L
Receiver: R7008SB
Aileron servo: BLS174SV×2 ( Optional )HUB×3 ( Optional )Rudder Servo: BLS175SV×1 ( Optional )Elevator servo: BLS173SV(i)×2 ( Optional )26 <Before Use>S.BUS Wiring example
Receiver *When using 8/SB as S.BUS, you have to set CH

Mode of the mode B or mode D.
●S.BUS Servo
Since the channel number is memorized by the
S.BUS itself, any connector can be used. When
the SBD-1 (sold separately) is used, ordinary
servos can be used with the S.BUS system.
*SBD-1 cannot be used by S.BUS2 port.

%DWWHU\

6%86
3RUW
6%

6ZLWFK*<([WHQVLRQFRUG

7HUPLQDOER[●7HUPLQDOER[
Four connectors can be inserted+XE

WARNING+XE+XE

Power supply
Please make sure that you
use a battery that can deliver
enough capacity for thenumber and kind of servos
used. Alkaline batteries
cannot be used.

6%866HUYR+XE‫ق‬$QRWKHUSRZHUVXSSO\‫ك‬
6ZLWFK+XE●When separate power supply used

+XE

%DWWHU\

When a large number of servos are used orwhen high current servos are used, the servos
can be driven by a separate power supply byusing a separate Power Supply 3-way hub.

6%866HUYR
Green

+XE
‫ق‬$QRWKHUSRZHUVXSSO\‫ك‬+XE
OrangeThree connectors can beinserted.

Used when using a separate
power supply battery.

<Before Use> 27

S.BUS2 System
Using the S.Bus2 port an impressive array of telemetry sensors may be utilized.

S.BUS2 TABLE
Receiver port

S.BUS servo
S.BUS gyro

S.BUS2 servo
S.BUS2 gyro

Telemetry sensor

S.BUS

○

○

×

S.BUS2

× （※）

○

○

（※）Don't connect S.BUS servo,
S.BUS gyro to BUS2 connector.

S.BUS servo gyro has S.BUS correspondence and S.BUS2 correspondence.
Please con¿rm with a catalog or each operation manual.

&+PRGHLVVHWWR0RGH%>'@

6%86
SRUW
6%
6%86
SRUW

+XE

+XE

6%86VHUYR
6%86VHUYR
FRQQHFWLRQLVSRVVLEOH
6%86J\UR
FRQQHFWLRQLVSRVVLEOH
7HOHPHWU\VHQVRU
FRQQHFWLRQLVLPSRVVLEOH

28 <Before Use>

+XE

+XE

6%86VHUYR

7HOHPHWU\VHQVRU

6%86VHUYR
FRQQHFWLRQLVLPSRVVLEOH

6%86
*<52
ٔ

5XGGHUVHUYR

S.BUS/S.BUS2 device setting
S.BUS/S.BUS2 servos or a telemetry sensor can be connected directly to the FX-22. Channel setting andother data can be entered for the S.BUS/S.BUS2 servos or sensors.

);

1. Connect the S.BUS device you want to set
with as shown in the Àgure.
2. Turn on the transmitter power.
3. Call the setup screen.
Servo: System Menu → S.BUS servo
Sensor: Linkage Menu → Sensor
4. Perform setting in accordance with eachscreen.
5. This sets the channel and other data for each
S.BUS servo, or telemetry device to be usedwith the S.BUS device or receiver.

*It is not necessary to carry out multiple
connection of the battery like a T18MZ/
T14SG.
(It will damage, if it connects.)*When you connect to a transmitter many servos
which consume many current, please use"Another power supply HUB".
And electric power is supplied to a servo withanother power supply.
+XE‫ق‬$QRWKHUSRZHUVXSSO\‫ك‬
6ZLWFK+XE+XE

6%866%86
GHYLFH
6%866%86VHUYR
7HOHPHWU\VHQVRU%DWWHU\

6%866HUYR●When separate power supply used
When a large number of servos are used orwhen high current servos are used, the servos
can be driven by a separate power supply byusing a separate Power Supply 3-way hub.
Green

+XE
‫ق‬$QRWKHUSRZHUVXSSO\‫ك‬Used when using a separate
power supply battery.

<Before Use> 29

Telemetry System
The R7008SB receiver features bi-directional communication with a FASSTest Futaba transmitter using
the S.BUS2 port. Using the S.BUS2 port an impressive array of telemetry sensors may be utilized. It also
includes both standard PWM output ports and S.BUS output ports.
*Telemetry is available only in the FASSTest 14CH mode. (12CH mode displays only receiver battery
voltage and extra battery voltage.)*The telemetry function requires the corresponding receiver (R7008SB).
* Telemetry display only FX-22 ID of R7008SB was remembered to be.

);●Telemetry sensor (sold separately)Your aircrafts data can be checked in thetransmitter by connecting various telemetry
sensors to the S.BUS2 connector of thereceiver.

Telemetry
Data

Info

SignalInfoPower battery voltage isdisplayed at the transmitter.

Voltage

Receiver

Battery voltage isdisplayed at the transmitter.

Info

6%86
FRQQHFWRU+XE

6ZLWFKInfo

7HUPLQDOER[Info

7HPSHUDWXUH
6HQVRU

Slot 1530
6HQVRU

Slot 2$OWLWXGH
6HQVRU

Slot 3 〜 5

9ROWDJH
6HQVRU

Slot 6 〜 7*36
6HQVRU

Slot 8 〜 15

+XE

●Slot No.
Servos are classified by channel, but sensors
are classified by “slot” . Since the initial slot
No. of the FX-22 is preset at each sensor, thesensors can be used as is by connecting
them. There are 1~31 slots.

30 <Before Use>6HQVRU

Slot 16

6HQVRU

Slot 17

Info+XE

Slot 31BASIC OPERATION
Battery Charging
Before charging batteries, read the "Cautions for handling battery and battery charger" in the section"NiMH/NiCd Battery Safety and Handling Instructions".
How to charge the NiMH battery HT6F1800B
for the transmitter*Battery charging will not automatically stop. Remove thebattery and transmitter from the charger and remove thecharger from the wall socket.
*It is recommended to reactivate the battery by cycling
several times if the battery has not been used for a long
period.

Danger
The NiMH battery HT6F1800B is only foryour FX-22. Do not use this battery for otherequipment.
Be sure to use the attached special charger tocharge the battery.

*In the case of NiMH/NiCd batteries, you may find poor
performance of the battery if you have used the battery
only for a short period or if you repeat charging while thebattery is not fully discharged. It is suggested to discharge
the battery to the recommended level after use. It is also
recommended to charge the battery just before use.

*If you take the NiMH battery HT6F1800B out of thetransmitter, you can use the optional quick charger CR-2000
corresponding to NiMH battery.

[Method of charging battery]●Special charger*Connect to AC outlet
speciﬁed.

Receiver Batt.
Charging display

Transmitter Batt.
Charging display

To FX-22 charge
connector

1. Connect the special charger to the wall
socket (AC outlet).
2. Connect the connectors to the FX-22
charging jack.
&RQ¿UPWKDWWKHFKDUJLQJLQGLFDWRU/('ODPSLVRQ
*Turn off the transmitter while charging the battery.

3. Remove the battery after 15 hours.

<Basic Operation> 31

How to turn transmitter power ON/OFF
W h e n t u r n i n g o n t h e p o w e r, t h e F X - 2 2transmitter will begin emmiting RF automatically
DIWHULWFRQ¿UPVWKHVXUURXQGLQJ5)FRQGLWLRQVThe FX-22 transmitter also offers the ability toauto shut-down.

*below 1/3 stick, the warning display goes off.

When turning on the power of the transmitter
THR Stick Slow

Registration of the user's name
If so desired, the FX-22 transmitter can indicate
the owner's name.
1. Turn on the power switch of the transmitter.
7KHPHVVDJH&+(&.5)&21',7,21LVGLVSOD\HGIRUDPRPHQW$WWKHVDPHWLPHWKHOHIW/('PRQLWRUEOLQNV

User's name setup screen
1. Turn on the power of the transmitter.
*The home screen appears.

2. Lightly touch the SYS button twice rapidly
and the System menu appears.
3. Select [USER NAME] in the System menu andtouch the RTN button.
2. Then, you will see the home screen and thetransmitter begins to emit radio waves.

*The user name set up screen appears.

7KHOHIWDQGULJKW/('PRQLWRUVZLOOFKDQJHWRVROLGUHGHow to stop the transmitter
1. Turn off the power switch of the transmitter.
*The transmitter shuts down at once.

Low battery alarm
When the battery voltage reaches 7.2V, an
DXGLEOH DODUP ZLOO VRXQG /DQG \RXU DLUFUDIW
immediately.
It can change from 6.0V to 7.6V by [WARNING]
RI>/,1.$*(0(18@It recommends using it with an initial value.
*If you do not operate the transmitter (or move a stick,knob, switch or digital trim) for 30 minutes, the message3/($6(78512))32:(56:,7&+LVGLVSOD\HGDQG
an audible alarm will sound.

Warning display at power ON (Airplane/
Helicopter):KHQ WKH WKURWWOH VWLFN GXULQJ 3RZHU 2Q LV DW
the high side (or over 1/3 stick) a warning will be
displayed.

32 <Basic Operation>

Input Box
*Current user name is displayed.

Changing the user name
1. Change the user name as described below:[Moving cursor in input box]
Select [ł] or [ń], and touch the RTN button.
[Deleting a character]
When [DELETE] is selected and the RTN button
is touched, the character immediately after
the cursor is deleted.
[Adding a character]
When a character is selected from thecharacter list and the RTN button is touched,that character is added at the position
immediately after the cursor.
*A name of up to 10 characters long can be entered as theuser name. (A space is also counted as one character.)

2. At the end of input, select [ENTER] and tuoch
the RTN button. (To terminate input andreturn to the original state, select [CANCEL]
and touch the RTN button.)Home screen
8VHWKHWRXFKVHQVRUWRVHOHFWWKHIROORZLQJGLVSOD\DUHDWRFDOOHDFKVHWWLQJVFUHHQDQGWRXFKWKH571
button. The setting screen appears.
System timer

Key lock• This shows the accumulated time since
the latest reset. (Hour):(Minute)• Use the cursor to highlight this, thentouch the RTN button for one second
to reset the system timer.

• Touch the S1 button or push the
HOME/EXIT button for one second to
lock/unlock the key operation.
In the key lock mode the key icon isdisplayed here.

Up/Down timer (ST1, ST2)
• Timer is displayed here.
Touch the RTN button at the [xx]:[xx.
xx] item to start/stop the timer.
• Use the cursor to highlight this, thentouch the RTN button at the ST1 or ST2
item to call the timer set-up screen.
*See the description at the back of this manual.

User's name

RF indicatorSD card indicator
Battery Indicator• When the battery voltage
reaches 7.2V(Change in
Warning Menu), the alarm
will beep. Land your aircraft
immediately.

Model type
Model Name
• The model name thatis currently used isdisplayed here.
• Use the cursor tohighlight this, thentouch the RTN button
to call the model
select set-up screen.

System mode

Model timer• System(FASSTest14CH etc.)
mode is displayed here.
• Use the cursor to highlight this,then touch the RTN button
to call the frequency set-up
screen.

• This shows the accumulated timesince the latest reset. (each model)(Hour):(Minute)• Use the cursor to highlight this,then touch the RTN button for one
second to reset the model timer.

Digital trim (T1 to T4)• Trim position is displayed here.
• You can select the display unit
on the home screen on the
T1-T4 setting screen within thelinkage menu.

2nd Home screen• Touch the RTN button at
the clock icon to call the
2 nd home screen (large
size timer).

Condition name (Heli/Glider)• In the normal condition, move thecursor to the condition name andtouch the RTN button. The condition
name is changed and blinks.
It is possible to operate the digitaltrim in all conditions.

VPP condition # (Air)• When VPP function is assigned to achannel, the current VPP condition# is displayed here.

<Basic Operation> 33

User Menu
A user menu which allows the user tocustomize and display frequently used functions
has been added.
1. When the "U.MENU" button is pushed fortwo seconds, the user menu appears.
5HWXUQWRWKHKRPHVFUHHQE\WRXFKLQJWKH(;,7EXWWRQ
while the user menu is being displayed.

2. When the cursor highlights the dotted line,"----------" and the RTN button is touched,
the menu selection screen appears.

3. When the cursor is moved to the settingthat you to set to the user menu and the
RTN button is touched, that setting screen
is added to the user menu.
4. The registered setting screen can becalled by moving the cursor to it andtouching the RTN button.
*When you want to delete an added screen from the user
menu, highlight item you wish to delete, press and holdthe RTN button for one second.

34 <Basic Operation>

Warning%HVXUHWRFRQ¿UPWKHPRGHOQDPHEHIRUHÀ\LQJ\RXUDLUFUDIW
Check the battery voltage as often as
possible and try to charge the battery
earlier. If the battery alarm makes a sound,
land your aircraft immediately.

Link procedure (FX-22/R7008SB)(DFKWUDQVPLWWHUKDVDQLQGLYLGXDOO\DVVLJQHGXQLTXH,'FRGH,QRUGHUWRVWDUWRSHUDWLRQWKHUHFHLYHUPXVWEHOLQNHGZLWKWKH,'FRGHRIWKHWUDQVPLWWHUZLWKZKLFKLWLVEHLQJSDLUHG2QFHWKHOLQNLVPDGH
the ID code is stored in the receiver and no further linking is necessary unless the receiver is to be usedwith another transmitter. When you purchase additional R7008SB receivers, this procedure is necessary;otherwise the receiver will not work.
Link procedure
1. Place the transmitter and the receiver close
to each other within half (0.5m) meter.

6. When changing battery fail-safe voltage
from the initial value 3.8V, voltage ischanged here.
* Only in FASSTest Mode.

Less than 0.5 m

2. Turn on the transmitter.
3. Select [SYSTEM] at the Linkage menu andaccess the setup screen shown below by
touching the RTN button.

:You cann do this through the LINK
LINKAGE Menu
and scroll to System and press RTN.
4. When you use two receivers on one model,
you must change from [SINGLE] to [DUAL].
*Only two receivers can be used. In"DUAL", two setting items come out. Input,
respectively.

ID of a Primary
receiver displays.

7.[LINK] is chosen by scrolling and the RTN
button is pushed. The transmitter will emit achime as it starts the linking process.

8. When the transmitter starts to chime, poweron the receiver. The receiver should link to
the transmitter within about 1 second.

In "Link" Mode

ID of a Secondary
receiver displays.

Receiver ON

In DUAL, a primary receiveris link previously. Next, asecondary receiver is link.
5. "F" will be chosen if it is used in France. others"G" general.

9. If linking fails, an error message is displayed.
Bring the transmitter closer to the receiverand repeat the procedure above from Step 2.
10. ACT will be chosen if telemetry is used.
It is INH when not using it.

<Basic Operation> 35

11. When a telemetry function is enabled,
the receiving interval (down-link interval) of
sensor data can be changed. If a DL interval
is increased, the response of the sensor data
display becomes slower, but stick response
will improve.
Initial value: 1.0s
Adjustment range: 0.1s~2.0s* If there are many FASSTest systems turned on around yourreceiver, it might not link to your transmitter. In this case,
HYHQLIWKHUHFHLYHU V/('VWD\VVROLGJUHHQXQIRUWXQDWHO\
the receiver might have established a link to one of othertransmitters. This is very dangerous if you do not noticethis situation. In order to avoid the problem, we strongly
recommend you to doublecheck whether your receiver isreally under control by your transmitter by giving the stick
input and then checking the servo response.
*Do not perform the linking operation when the drive motor
is connected or the engine is running.
* When you use two receivers, please be sure to setup a"primary" and "secondary" in the "dual" mode.
*A telemetry function cannot be used for the 2nd receiver of
GXDOUHFHLYHUPRGH7KHYROWDJHDQG([WYROWDJHRIDQG
receiver cannot be known with a transmitter.
* You must link one receiver at a time. If both power
supplies to the receivers are switched on simultaneously,
data is received incorrectly by the transmitter.
* If a dual receiver function is used, in order to receive
sensor information correctly by both sets, telemetry data
will be slower compared to a single receiver setup.
* You cannot link three receivers.
/LQNLVUHTXLUHGZKHQDV\VWHPW\SHLVFKDQJHG
/LQNLQJLVUHTXLUHGZKHQHYHUDQHZPRGHOLVPDGH

Warning
After the linking is done, please cycle receiver
power and check that the receiver to be linked
is really under the control of the transmitter.
Do not perform the linking procedure withmotor's main wire connected or with the engine
operating as it may result in serious injury.

36 <Basic Operation>

Range Testing Your R/C System,WLVH[WUHPHO\LPSRUWDQWWRUDQJHFKHFN\RXUPRGHOVSULRUWRHDFKIO\LQJVHVVLRQ7KLVHQDEOHV\RXWRHQVXUHWKDWHYHU\WKLQJLVIXQFWLRQLQJDVLWVKRXOGDQGWRREWDLQPD[LPXPHQMR\PHQWIURP\RXUWLPHÀ\LQJThe FX-22 transmitter incorporates a system that reduces its power output and allows you to perform such arange check.
Range check mode

Range check procedure

We have installed a special "Range checkmode" for doing a ground range check. To accessthe "Range check mode" touch and hold the RTN
button while turning on the transmitter. Doing so
ZLOOEULQJXS32:(502'(PHQX

1. With the "Range check mode" on, walkaway from the model while simultaneously
operating the controls. Have an assistant
stand by the model to confirm that allcontrols are completely and correctly
operational. You should be able to walkapproximately 30-50 paces from the model
without losing control.
2. If everything operates correctly, return tothe model. Set the transmitter in a safe, yetaccessible, location so it will be within reachafter starting the engine or motor. Be certain
the throttle stick is in the low throttle position,then start the engine or motor. Perform
another range check with your assistantholding the aircraft with the engine runningat various speeds. If the servos jitter or move
inadvertently, there may be a problem. We
would strongly suggest you do not Áy until thesource of the difÀculty has been determined.
Look for loose servo connections or binding
pushrods. Also, be certain that the battery
has been fully charged.

The present model

To activate the "Range check mode" touch the
RTN button and the range check mode screen willappear.

During this mode, the RF power output isreduced so the range test can be performed. In
addition, when this mode is activated the right/('RQWKHIURQWRIWKHWUDQVPLWWHUVWDUWVEOLQNLQJ
and the transmitter gives users a warning with abeeping sound every 3 seconds.
The "Range check mode" continues for 90
seconds and after that the power will return
WR WKH QRUPDO OHYHO 7R H[LW WKH 5DQJH FKHFN
PRGHEHIRUHWKHVHFRQGVVHOHFWWKH5$1*(&+(&. DW WKH WRS RI WKH VFUHHQ DQG WRXFK WKHRTN button again. This mode is available one
time only so if you need to re-use this function the
WUDQVPLWWHU SRZHU PXVW EH F\FOHG 1(9(5 VWDUWÀ\LQJZKHQWKH5DQJHFKHFNPRGHLVDFWLYH
Should you require additional time to performa range check, highlight Restart before your time
H[SLUHVDQGSUHVVWKH571EXWWRQRQHWLPH

Range checking on
low power.

About 100 feet

Range check mode

Warning'RQRWÀ\LQWKHUDQJHFKHFNPRGH
*Since the range of the radio waves is short, if the model
is too far from the transmitter, control will be lost and themodel will crash.

<Basic Operation> 37

RECEIVER AND SERVO INSTALLATION
Receiver and servos connection
Connect the receiver and servos in accordance with the connection diagram shown below. Always read thesection [Before using]. When mounting the receiver and servos to the fuselage, connect the necessary points
in accordance with the model's instruction manual.
Receiver and servos connection diagram
Always connect the necessary number of servos.
The receiver channel assignment depends on themodel type. See the Servo connection by modeltype tables.

R7008SB (output connector section)sCH1~6: Output connectors 1~6
s" /UTPUT CONNECTORS  AND 0OWER SUPPLYs3" /UTPUT CONNECTORS  OR 3"53 SYSTEM
s3"53 3"53 SYSTEM

CH1~8,
S.BUS/（2）,B

Receiver battery

Charging port

Receiver switch
Servos38 <Receiver and Servo Installation>

Servo connection by model type
The FX-22 transmitter channels are automatically assigned for optimal combination according to the typeselected with the Model Type function of the Linkage Menu. The channel assignment (initial setting) for
each model type is shown below. Connect the receiver and servos to match the type used.
*The set channels can be checked at the Function screen of the Linkage Menu. The channel assignments can also be changed. For
more information, read the description of the Function menu.

Airplane/glider
Normal wing and V-tail2Aileron

2Aileron+1FLAP 2Aileron+2FLAP 2Aileron+4FLAP 4Aileron+2FLAP

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider1

AileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileron2

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

3

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

RudderRudderRudderRudder4

RudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderAileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

5

Gear

AUX7

Gear

AUX7

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX5

Flap

Flap

Aileron3

Aileron3

6

VPP

AUX6

Aileron2

Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Aileron2

Aileron2

Flap2

Flap2

Aileron4

Aileron4

7

AUX5

AUX5

VPP

AUX6

Aileron2

Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Flap3

Flap3

Flap

Flap

8

AUX4

AUX4

AUX5

AUX5

VPP

AUX5

Flap2

Flap2

Flap4

Flap4

Flap2

Flap2

9

AUX1

AUX1

CamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamber

10

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

VPP

ButterﬂyGear

ButterﬂyGear

Butterﬂy

11

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

12

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

VPP

AUX1

VPP

AUX1

DG1

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

DG2

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

FASST MULT

GliderFASSTest 14CH
FASSTest 12CH
S-FHSSFASST 7CH

Airplane

The output
CH of eachsystemＲＸ
CH

1Aileron

Ailvator (Dual Elevator)
2Aileron

2Aileron+1FLAP 2Aileron+2FLAP 2Aileron+4FLAP 4Aileron+2FLAP

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider1

AileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileron2

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

3

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

RudderRudderRudderRudder4

RudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderAileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

5

Gear

AUX7

Gear

AUX7

Gear

AUX6

Elevator2

Elevator2

Flap

Flap

Aileron3

Aileron3
Aileron4

6

VPP

AUX6

Aileron2

Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Aileron2

Aileron2

Flap2

Flap2

Aileron4

7

Elevator2

Elevator2

Elevator2

Elevator2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Flap3

Flap3

Flap

Flap

8

AUX4

AUX4

VPP

AUX5

Elevator2

Elevator2

Flap2

Flap2

Flap4

Flap4

Flap2

Flap2

9

AUX1

AUX1

CamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamber

10

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Butterﬂy

VPP

ButterﬂyGear

ButterﬂyGear

ButterﬂyGear

Butterﬂy

11

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

VPP

AUX1

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

12

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Elevator2

Elevator2

Elevator2

Elevator2

DG1

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

DG2

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

<Receiver and Servo Installation> 39

FASST MULT

GliderFASSTest 14CH
FASSTest 12CH
S-FHSSFASST 7CH

Airplane

The output
CH of eachsystemＲＸ
CH

1AileronAirplane/glider
Flying wing, Delta wing
2Aileron+1FLAP 2Aileron+2FLAP 2Aileron+4FLAP 4Aileron+2FLAP

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider1

AileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileron

2

VPP

AUX4

VPP

AUX4

VPP

AUX4

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

3

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

RudderRudderAileron3

Aileron3

4

RudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudder

VPP

AUX4

Aileron4

Aileron4

5

Gear

AUX7

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Flap

Flap

RudderRudder6

Aileron2

Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap2

Flap2

VPP

AUX4

7

AUX6

AUX6

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Flap3

Flap3

Flap

Flap

8

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

Flap2

Flap2

Flap4

Flap4

Flap2

Flap2

9

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

10

CamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamber

11

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

ButterﬂyGear

ButterﬂyGear

Butterﬂy

12

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

DG1

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

DG2

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

FASST MULT

GliderFASSTest 14CH
FASSTest 12CH
S-FHSSFASST 7CH

Airplane

The output
CH of eachsystemＲＸ
CH

2Aileron

Flying wing, Delta wing (Winglet 2 Rudder)

Airplane

Glider2Aileron+1FLAP 2Aileron+2FLAP 2Aileron+4FLAP 4Aileron+2FLAP

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

GliderAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronRudder2

Rudder2

Rudder2

Rudder2

Rudder2

Rudder2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

3

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

RudderRudderAileron3

Aileron3

4

RudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudder2

Rudder2

Aileron4

Aileron4

5

Gear

AUX7

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Flap

Flap

RudderRudder6

Aileron2

Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap2

Flap2

Rudder2

Rudder2

7

VPP

AUX6

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Flap3

Flap3

Flap

Flap

8

AUX5

AUX5

VPP

AUX5

Flap2

Flap2

Flap4

Flap4

Flap2

Flap2

9

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

10

CamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamber

11

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Butterﬂy

VPP

ButterﬂyGear

ButterﬂyGear

Butterﬂy

12

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

DG1

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

DG2

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

* Output channels differ by each system of a table. When using a system with few channels, there
is a wing type which cannot be used. It cannot be used when there is a function required out of
WKHUDQJHRIWKHDUURZRID¿JXUH

40 <Receiver and Servo Installation>

FASST MULT

Aileron2

FASSTest 14CH
FASSTest 12CH
S-FHSSFASST 7CH

1

The output
CH of eachsystemＲＸ
CH

2AileronHelicopter

H-4, H4X Swash

AileronAileron2

Elevator

Elevator

3

Throttle

Throttle

4

RudderRudder5

Gyro/RUD

Gyro/RUD

6

Pitch

Pitch

7

Governor

Governor

8

NeedleElevator2

9

Gyro2/AIL

Gyro2/AIL

10

Gyro3/ELE

Gyro3/ELE

11

AUX1

AUX1
AUX1

SW

SW

DG2

SW

SW

CH

All Other

H-4, H4X Swash

1

AileronAileron2

Elevator

Elevator

3

Throttle

Throttle

4

RudderElevator2● FASSTest12CH

5

Pitch

Pitch

6

Gyro/RUD

Gyro/RUD

7

Governor

Governor

8

Governor 2

Rudder9

Gyro2/AIL

Gyro2/AIL

10

Gyro3/ELE

Gyro3/ELE

DG1

SW

SW

DG2

SW

SW

FASSTest 12CH

AUX1

The output
CH of eachsystem12
DG1

FASST MULTAll Other

1

FASSTest 14CH
S-FHSSFASST 7CHCH

The output
CH of eachsystem● FASSTest14CH/FASST MULTI/FASST 7CH/S-FHSS

Ɣ6LQFH WKH FK GRHVQ W ZRUN RQ WKH FK PRGH SOHDVH DVVLJQ WKHHOHYDWRU + +;  RU WKH QHHGOH DOO RWKHU  WR  FKDQQQHO LI WKHgovernor is not used.

<Receiver and Servo Installation> 41

MODEL BASIC SETTING PROCEDURE
Airplane/glider basic setting procedure
1. Model addition and selection

3. Fuselage linkage

Initially, the FX-22 assigns the first model tomodel-01 in the transmitter. The Model Selectfunction of the Linkage Menu is used to add
models and to select amongst models which are
already set.

Connect the ailerons, elevators, throttle, rudder,etc. in accordance with the model's instruction
manual. For a description of the connection
method, see the Receiver and Servos Connection.

The FX-22 is capable of storing data for up to 30
models in its internal memory. Additional model
data can also be saved to an optional SD card.
The currently selected model name is displayed
LQWKHFHQWHURIWKHKRPHVFUHHQ%HIRUHÀ\LQJDQG
before changing any settings, always confirm themodel name.
When a new model is added, the Model typeselect screen and System mode setup screen
automatically appear. Please be aware that thetransmitter will stop transmitting temporarily when
you change the model.
When a new model is added, you will need to relink the receiver.

Note that even for the same "airplanemodel", when the wing type and tail typeare different, the channel assignment may
be different. (The channel assigned to eachfunction can be checked at the Function
menu of the Linkage Menu.)

ŏ If the direction of the servo is incorrect, adjust
the direction with the Reverse function of the
Linkage Menu.

ŏ Adjust the neutral position and control
surface angle with the linkage, and finetune them with the Sub-Trim and End Point
functions (angle adjustment). To protect thelinkage, a limit position can also be set with
the End Point function. The End Point function
can adjust the amount of up/down and left/right movement and limit of each channel.

2. Model type selection
Select the model type matched to the aircraftwith the Model Type select function of the Linkage
Menu. For an airplane, select the model type fromamong the 2 types: airplane and glider. And thenselect the wing type and the tail type matched tothe aircraft.

42 <Model Basic Setting Procedure>

4. Throttle cut setting (Airplane)
Throttle cut can be performed with one touch by aswitch without changing the throttle trim position.
Set throttle cut with the Throttle Cut function of
the Linkage Menu. After activating the throttle cut
function and selecting the switch, adjust the throttle
position so that the carburetor becomes fully closed.
For safety, the throttle cut function operates thethrottle stick in the 1/3 or less (slow side) position.

The offset amount of the aileron, elevator, andflap servos can be adjusted as needed. Also the
VSHHGRIWKHDLOHURQHOHYDWRUDQGÀDSVHUYRVFDQ
be adjusted. You can also set the Auto Mode, which
will link Airbrake to a stick, switch, or dial. A
separate stick switch or dial can also be set as the
ON/OFF switch.

5. Idle down setting (Airplane)
The idling speed can be lowered with one touchby a switch without changing the throttle trim
position. Perform this setting with the Idle Downfunction of the Linkage Menu. After activating the
Idle Down function and selecting the switch, adjust
the idle down speed. For safety, the idle downfunction acts only when the throttle stick is in thelowest part of its throw.
*While the Throttle Cut function is in operation, the Idle
Down function does not work.

$GGLWLRQRIÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV *OLGHUThe Condition Select function automaticallyallocates the normal condition (NORMAL) for
each model. NORMAL is the default condition andis the only one active when a new model type is
GH¿QHG,I\RXZDQWWRDGGÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVSOHDVHUHIHU
to a description of the CONDITION function.

6. D/R function
D/R function is used to adjust the throw andoperation curve of the stick functions (aileron,elevator, rudder and throttle) for each switch
SRVLWLRQ DLUSODQH RUHDFKÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQ JOLGHU 
7KLVLVQRUPDOO\XVHGDIWHUWKHPRGHOHUKDVGH¿QHG
the maximum throw directions in the End Point
settings.
(Airplane)*The NORMAL is always on, and remains on until otherconditions are activated by switches, stick positions, etc.
Please refer to the section entitled Switch Selection Method
for additional information on how to do so.
*It is possible to customize the activation of the flight
conditions.
*The Condition Delay can be programmed for each channel.
The Condition Delay is used to change the servo throwsmoothly when switching conditions.

(Glider)

7. Airbrake (Airplane)
This function is used when an airbrake isnecessary when taking off or diving, etc. Please
note: this menu item is only available under certain
ZLQJFRQ¿JXUDWLRQV)RUH[DPSOHLWZLOOQRWDSSHDU
if a single aileron wing type has been selected.
7KHSUHVHWHOHYDWRUDQGÀDSRIIVHWDPRXQWFDQ
be activated by a switch.
<Model Basic Setting Procedure> 43

Helicopter basic setting procedure
This section outlines examples of use of the helicopter functions of the FX-22. Adjust the actual values,
etc. to match the fuselage used.
1. Model addition and selection
Initially, the FX-22 assigns the first model tomodel-01 in the transmitter. To add new models
or to select a model already programmed, use theModel Select function of the Linkage Menu.

functions for the chosen model type. Six swash types areavailable for helicopters.
*For a description of the swash type selection, refer to the
MODEL TYPE function.

3. Flight condition addition
7KHWUDQVPLWWHURIIHUVXSWR¿YHÀLJKWFRnditions
per model.

This is convenient when selecting a model after
entering the model's names in advance. The FX22 is capable of storing up to 30 models in thetransmitter's internal memory. Additional models
can also be stored in an optional SD card.
The currently selected model is displayed in
the middle of the screen. Before flying and beforechanging any settings, always confirm the model
name.
When a new model is added, the Model Type selectscreen and system mode setup screen automaticallyappear. Change, or check that they match the swash
type and receiver type of the model used.
When a new model is added, you will need to relink the receiver.

The Condition Select function automatically
DOORFDWHV¿YHFRQGLWLRQVIRUKHOLFRSWHUV(Initial setting)ŏ NORMALŏ IDLE UP1 (SW-E)
ŏ IDLE UP2 (SW-E)
ŏ IDLE UP3 (SW-F)ŏHOLD (Hold switch is not assigned initially)
Note: Since you may accidentally activate
a condition that not previously setup duringÁLJKWZKLFKFRXOGFDXVHDFUDVKZHVXJJHVW
deleting conditions that are not used.
*For a description of the condition deletion, refer to theCondition Select function.

2. Model type and swash type selection
If a different model type is already selected,
select helicopter with the Model Type function of
the Linkage Menu, and then select the swash typematched to the helicopter.

The NORMAL condition is always on, andremains on until other conditions are activated byswitches.
The priority is throttle hold/idle up 3/idle up 2/
idle up 1/normal. Throttle hold has the highest
priority.
The Condition Delay can be programmed foreach channel and condition. The Condition Delayis used to change the servo throw smoothly whenswitching conditions.
*HQHUDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVHWWLQJH[DPSOH
ŏ Normal: (Use initial setting conditions/operate
when switch OFF)Use from engine starting to hovering.

ŏ Idle up 1: (Operate at SW-E center)
Use in stall turn, loop, and other maneuvers.

ŏ Idle up 2: (Operate at SW-E forward side)*The Model Type function automatically selects theappropriate output channels, control functions, and mixing

Use in rolls.

ŏ Throttle hold: (Operate at SW-G forward side)
Use in auto rotation.

44 <Model Basic Setting Procedure>

4. Servo Connection

5. Throttle/Pitch curve setting

Connect the throttle rudder, aileron, elevator,
pitch, and other servos in accordance with the
kit instruction manual. For a description of theconnection method, see "Receiver and Servos
Connection".

This function adjusts the throttle or pitch
operation curve in relation to the movement of thethrottle stick for each condition.

Note: The channel assigned to each function
can be checked at the Function menu of the
Linkage Menu.

7KURWWOHFXUYHVHWWLQJH[DPSOH!
Activate the throttle curve of each condition withthe condition select switch.
ŏNormal curve adjustment
ŏ If the direction of operation of the servo
is incorrect, use the Reverse function of
the Linkage Menu. Also use the swash AFR
function in other than the H-1 mode.

Normal curve creates a basic throttle curve
centered near hovering. This curve is adjusted
together with the pitch curve (Normal) so that theengine speed is constant and up/down control iseasiest.

ŏIdle up curve adjustment
The low side Throttle curve creates a curve
matched for aerobatics (loop, roll, 3D, etc.).

ŏThrottle hold curve adjustmentConÀrm that the rate of the slowest position (0) of
the stick is 0 (initial setting).

<([DPSOHRISLWFKFXUYHVHWWLQJ!
ŏ Adjust the direction of operation of the gyro.
(Gyro side function)
ŏ Connect the throttle linkage so that the
carburetor can fully close at full trim throttle
cut.
ŏ Adjust the neutral position at the linkage sideand Àne tune with the Sub-Trim function and
End Point function. To protect the linkage,a limit position can also be set with the End
Point function.

Activate the pitch curve of each condition withthe condition select switch.
ŏPitch curve (Normal)
Make the pitch at hovering approximately 5º~6º.
Set the pitch at hovering with the stick position at
the 50 point as the standard.
*Stability at hovering may be connected to the throttle curve.
Adjustment is easy by using the hovering throttle function
and hovering pitch function together.

ŏPitch curve (Idle up 1)
The idle up 1 pitch curve function creates a curve
matched to airborne Áight.
Set to -7º~12º as standard.

ŏPitch curve (Idle up 2)
The high side pitch setting is less than idle up 1.
The standard is 8º.

ŏPitch curve (Hold)At auto rotation, use the maximum pitch at boththe high and low sides.

ŏ Swash plate correction (Except H-1 mode)*If any interactions are noticed, for a description of thelinkage correction function, please refer to the SWASH
function.

[Pitch angle setting example]
Throttle hold: -7º~12º<Model Basic Setting Procedure> 45

6. D/R function
D/R function is used to adjust the throw andoperation curve of aileron, elevator and rudder foreach condition.
*For throttle and pitch curve settings, refer to the aforementioned "Throttle/Pitch curve setting"

7KLVLVQRUPDOO\XVHGDIWHU(QG3RLQWKDVGH¿QHG
the maximum throw directions.

function from the Model Menu, and set the curvefor each condition. (At initial setting, this function
is in the "INH" state. To use it, set it to the "ON"state.)
6HWWLQJH[DPSOH!
Activate the mixing curve of each condition withthe condition select switch.
A curve setting example is shown below.
ŏPitch to RUD mixing curve (Normal)
Use the hovering system and set this curve tomatch take off and landing and vertical climb at aconstant speed.

ŏPitch to RUD mixing (Idle up 1)

*\URVHQVLWLYLW\DQGPRGHVZLWFKLQJ
The gyro sensitivity and mode switching
function is utilized to adjust the gyro mixing of themodel, and can be set for each condition.

Use this curve in stall turn, loop, and adjust it so thefuselage is facing straight ahead when heading
into the wind.

ŏPitch to RUD mixing (Hold)This function is set so that the fuselage is facingstraight ahead at straight line auto rotation. The
pitch of the tail rotor becomes nearly 0º.

9. Throttle hold settingŏ Normal condition (hovering): Gyro sensitivity
maximumŏ Idle up 1/Idle up 2/Throttle hold: Gyro
sensitivity minimumŏ However, during auto rotations with a taildriven helicopter, this function may not haveany effect on the high gyro sensitivity.

3LWFKWR58'PL[LQJVHWWLQJ
Note: When using a Futaba GY Gyro, or otherheading hold gyro, this Pitch to RUD mixing
should not be used. The reaction torque iscorrected by the gyro. When operating the
gyro in the AVCS mode, the mixed signal willcause neutral deviation symptoms and the
gyro will not operate normally.

*If throttle hold is necessary, please refer to the THR HOLD
function.

10. Throttle cut setting
Throttle cut provides an easy way to stop the
HQJLQHE\ÀLSSLQJDVZLWFKZLWKWKHWKURWWOHVWLFN
at idle. The action is not functional at high throttle
to avoid accidental dead sticks. The switch’s
location and direction must be chosen, as it defaults
to NULL.

*With throttle stick at idle, adjust the cut position until theengine consistently shuts off, but throttle linkage is notbinding.

Use this function when you want to suppress
the torque generated by the changes in the pitchand speed of the main rotor during pitch operation.
Adjust it so that the nose does not swing in therudder direction. However, when using a heading
hold gyro like those shown above, do not use Pitch
to rudder mixing.
Activate the Pitch to rudder (Pit → RUD) mixing

46 <Model Basic Setting Procedure>6ZDVK0L[FRUUHFWVDLOHURQHOHYDWRUDQG
pitch interaction
The swash mix function is used to correct theswash plate in the aileron (Left/Right Cyclic)
and elevator (Forward/Aft Cyclic) direction
corresponding to each operation of each condition.

7KURWWOHPL[LQJVHWWLQJ*If throttle mixing is necessary for a compensation forslowing of engine speed caused by swash plate operation
during aileron or elevator operation, please refer to the
THROTTLE MIX function.

2WKHUVSHFLDOPL[LQJVŏPitch to Needle mixing
This mixing is used with engines with a design whichallows needle control during flight (fuel-air mixture
adjustment). A needle curve can be set.

ŏGovernor mixing
This mixing is dedicated governor mixing when agovernor is used.

<Model Basic Setting Procedure> 47

SYSTEM MENUThe System Menu sets up functions of thetransmitter: This does not set up any model data.

ŏ Call the system menu shown below by
touching the SYS button twice at the home
screen, etc.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select [SYSTEM MENU]
and return to the home
screen by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursorŏAccess setup screen
RETURNŏ Select the function you want to set and callthe setup screen by touching the RTN button.

System Menu functions table[TRAINER]: Starts and sets the trainer system.
[DISPLAY]: LCD and back-light adjustment[USER NAME]: User name registration[SOUND]: Turns off the buzzer.
[H/W SET]: H/W reverse, calibration and stick mode
[START SEL.]: Immediately, a model selection can be performed[AUTO LOCK]: The automatic lock function of two kinds of touch sensors[INFO]: Displays the program version, SD card information, product ID, and language selection.
[SBUS SERVO]: S.BUS servo setting.

48 <Functions of System Menu>

Trainer system starting and setting

TRAINER

FX-22 trainer system makes it possible for the
instructor to chose which channels and operation
modes that can be used in the students transmitter.
The function and rate of each channel can beset, the training method can also be matched tothe student's skill level. Two transmitters must beconnected by an optional Trainer Cord, and theInstructors’ transmitter should be programmed fortrainer operation, as described below.
When the Instructor activates the trainer switch,
the student has control of the aircraft (if MIX/FUNC/NORM mode is turned on, the Instructor
can make corrections while the student has control).
When the switch is released the Instructor regains
control. This is very useful if the student gets theaircraft into an undesirable situation.
ŏ Setting data are stored to model data.
ŏ Student rate can be adjusted at MIX/FUNC/NORM mode.
ŏ Activated student channels can be selectedby switches.

NOTE: This trainer system can be used in thefollowing manner;
1. With the FX-22 transmitter and a conventionaltransmitter, if the channel order is different,
it is necessary to match the channel order
before using this function.
You can select the channel of input datafrom student's transmitter in the "FUNC" or"MIX" mode.
2. When the FX-22 is used as the instructor’stransmitter, set the modulation mode of thestudent’s transmitter to PPM.
If being used as the student, FX-22 can beconnected to the instructor's transmitter which
the PPM mode as the student's modulation
mode is required. FX-22 always sends PPM
mode signal from the trainer jack.
(In the case of student's transmitters other than
2.4 GHz)
3. Be sure that all channels work correctly in
ERWKWUDQVPLWWHUVEHIRUHÁ\LQJ

Corresponding types of transmitters and trainer mode settings:
Types of transmitters
Instructor

Student

FX-22/
T18M=/14SG

FX-22/
T18M=/14SG
T14M=, FX-40,
T12=, T12FG,
FX-30

FX-22
FX-22
FX-22
FX-22
FX-22
T14M=, FX-40,
T12=, T12FG,
FX-30
T8FG, FX-20
T10C, T10CG,
T9C, T7C,
T7C,T8-

T8FG, FX-20

Instructor's transmitter settings
System Type
Trainer setting
Mod. mode
CH modeStudent's transmitter settings
System Type
Trainer setting
Mod. mode
CH modeMod. mode

Arbitrary

16CH

Arbitrary

16CH-

Arbitrary

12CH

PCM-G3
2.4G

12CH

PPM

Arbitrary

12CH
8CH

FASST-MLT2
FASST-MULT--

Trainer Cords

T12FG and 9C
Trainer Cords

T10C, T9C,
T7C,T6EX,
T4EX
T10CG,T7C
T8-,T6-

Arbitrary

8CH

PPM

-

-

T12FG

Arbitrary
Arbitrary

8CH
8CH

Arbitrary
Arbitrary

-

-

T12FG

FX-22

Arbitrary

12CH

Arbitrary

12CH

-

FX-22

Arbitrary

12CH

Arbitrary

12CH

-

FX-22

Arbitrary-

Arbitrary

8CH-

T12FG and 9C
Trainer Cords<Functions of System Menu> 49ŏ Select [TRAINER] in the System menu and enter the
setup screen shown below by touching the RTN
button.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Systemmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURN

Mode and switch selection
1. Access the setup screen page 4 shown
below by touching the S1 button three times.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

Note: The trainer function won’t be turnedon unless the Instructor's transmitter receives
signals from the student's transmitter. Be
sure to confirm this after connecting yourtrainer cable.

Operating mode selection(Setup screen page 1-3)
2. Move the cursor to the [ACT] or [16/12/8CH]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
3. Select the mode by scrolling the touch
sensor. The display blinks. Touch the RTN
button to change the mode. (To terminate
the mode change, touch the S1 button.)"ACT": Enable operation by changing to [OFF]or [ON].
"16/12/8 CH": When the student uses the FX22, T18M=, select [16CH]. When the student
uses the T14M=, T12=, T12FG or FX-40, select[12CH]. Otherwise select [8CH].
If changing the trainer switch:
4. Move the cursor to the [SW] item and touch
the RTN button to access the switch setup
screen.
(See "Switch selection method" at the end of
this manual for selection method details.)"SW": Select the desired switch.
Initial setting: SH*The switch mode can also be selected when setting the ON
position on the switch setup screen. When [ALTERNATE
OFF] is selected, normal ON/OFF operation is performed.
When [ALTERNATE ON] is selected, the trainer functionis alternately turned on and off each time the switch isoperated. This allows alternate ON/OFF switching evenwhen a momentary switch (SH) is used.

50 <Functions of System Menu>

1. Move the cursor to the [MODE] item of thechannel you want to change and touch the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
2. Select the mode by scrolling the touch
sensor. The display blinks. Touch the RTN
button to change the mode. (To terminate
the mode change, touch the S1 button.)"MODE": Select the desired operation modefor each channel.
NORM: The model is controlled by signals from the student
transmitter.
MIX mode: The model is controlled by signals from the
instructor and student transmitters. (Reset the student's
model data to the default condition.)
FUNC mode (function mode): The model is controlled bysignals from the student transmitter with the instructor 's
setting. (Reset the student's model data to the default
condition.)
OFF: Only the instructor side operates.

Adjusting the student's rate.
*This can be adjusted for students who may need lower rates
than a more experienced student.

1. Move the cursor to the [RATE] item of thechannel you want to change and touch the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
2. Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
"RATE": Adjust the desired rate.
Setting range: 0~100
Initial value: 100
*When you want to reset the value to the initial state, touch
the RTN button for one second.

3. To end adjustment, touch the RTN button
and return to the cursor mode.

Changing the student's channel*The setting above allows setting of the channel assignmentof student side when [MIX] or [FUNC] was selected.

1. Move the cursor to the [STU. CH] item of thechannel you want to change and touch the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
2. Select the channel by scrolling the touch
sensor. The display blinks. Touch the RTN
button to change the channel. (To terminate
the mode change, touch the S1 button.)"STU. CH": Match the channel order of theInstructor's and student's transmitter. Thisfunction will help if both transmitters are indifferent modes, or the Master has a different
wing type set up. The student can be set
to match the Master without any physicalchanges being made.

<Functions of System Menu> 51

DISPLAY

LCD and back-light adjustment, unit system

LCD contrast, back-light brightness and backlight off-timer adjustment are possible:
Moreover, a display unit can be chosen from themetric system or yard/pound.

ŏ Select [DISPLAY] at the system menu and accessthe setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Systemmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Adjusting value

RETURNLCD contrast adjustment
1. Select "CONTRAST" and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode and adjust
the contrast by scrolling the touch sensor.
"CONTRAST": Adjust the contrast to thedesired value while watching the screen
display.
Setting range: (Lighter) 0 to 15 (Darker)
Initial value: 5*When you want to reset the value to the initial state, touch
the RTN button for one second.

2. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment andreturn to the cursor mode.

Back-light brightness adjustment
1. Select "BRIGHTNESS" and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode andadjust the back-light brightness by scrolling
the touch sensor.
"BRIGHTNESS": Adjust the brightness to thedesired value while watching the screen
display.
Setting range: OFF, 1 to 20(Lighter)
Initial value: 10*When you want to reset the value to the initial state, touch
the RTN button for one second.

52 <Functions of System Menu>

2. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment andreturn to the cursor mode.

Back-light off-timer
1. Select "OFF TIMER" and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode and adjust
the back-light off-timer by scrolling the touch
sensor.
"OFF TIMER": Adjust the time when the backlight turns off after operating the touch
sensor.
Setting range: 10 to 240 sec (each 10 sec),
OFF (always on)
Initial value: 10 sec*When you want to reset the value to the initial state, touch
the RTN button for one second.

2. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment andreturn to the cursor mode.

Unit system adjustment
1. Select "UNIT SYS." and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode and adjust
the unit by scrolling the touch sensor.
Setting range: (METRIC) or (YARD/POUND)
2. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment andreturn to the cursor mode.

USER NAME

User name registration

This function allows the modelers to change the
FX-22 user name.
*A name of up to 10 characters can be entered as the username. Please note that a space is also counted as one
character.

ŏ Select [USER NAME] at the System menu andaccess the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.
User name (candidate)<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Systemmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor

RETURN

User name registration(Character list 1/3)

1. Change the user name as described below:[Moving cursor in user name (candidate)]
Select [ł] or [ń], and touch the RTN button.
[Deleting a character]
When [DELETE] is selected and the RTN button
is touched, the character immediately after
the cursor is deleted.
[Adding a character]
When a character is selected from thecharacter list and the RTN button is touched,that character is added at the position
immediately after the cursor.

(Character list 2/3)

(Character list 3/3)

*A name of up to 10 characters long can be entered as theuser name. (A space is also counted as 1 character.)

2. Upon completing the input, select [ENTER]
and touch the RTN button. (To terminate
input and return to the original state, select[CANCEL] and touch the RTN button.)<Functions of System Menu> 53

SOUND

Turns off the buzzer.

The warning sound and other sounds of the FX22 transmitter can be turned off.
*When “WARNING” was set to OFF, the no operation alarm(30 minutes), mixing warning sound, and low battery alarmsounds also turned off.

ŏ Select [SOUND] at the system menu and accessthe setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode

ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Systemmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

RETURNŏThe setting range is from 0 to 30.
0 is silence.

On/off operation

Phone Volume

1. Move the cursor to the [TIMER][WARNING]
or [OTHER SOUND] item and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
2. Select the ON or OFF by scrolling the touch
sensor.

1. "SPEECH" is set to ACT on the alarm setting
screen of a sensor to hear a sound from.
2. A cursor is moved to the numerical value of
PONE VOLUME, and RTN is touched.
3.Volume is chosen by scrolling.

*The display blinks.

3.Touch the RTN button.

54 <Functions of System Menu>

H/W SETTING

Hardware reverse and stick mode

H/W reverse
This function reverses the operation direction of
the sticks, switches, trimmer levers, and knobs.
Note: This setting reverses the actual operation
signal, but does not change the display
indicators. Use the Normal mode as long as
there is no special reason to use the Reverse
mode.

Note: This will not change the throttle ratchet,etc. Those are mechanical changes thatmust be performed by a Futaba service
center.
Note: After changing the mode, these changes
are only applied to new models. It is notapplied to an existing model.

Stick calibration
J1-J4 stick correction can be performed.

Stick modeThis function changes the stick mode oftransmitter.

ŏ Select [H/W SET] at the system menu and accessthe setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor

ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Systemmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏAccess setup screen

RETURN

Operation direction reversal method

Changing stick mode

1. Select [H/W REVERSE] and access the setup
screen shown below by touching the RTN
button.

1.Select [STICK MODE] and access the setup
screen shown below by touching the RTN
button.

2. Move the cursor to the item corresponding
to the H/W (hardware) you want to reverse
and touch the RTN button to switch to thedata input mode.
3. Select the mode by scrolling the touch
sensor. The display blinks. When the RTN
button is touched, the operation direction isreversed. (To terminate the mode change,
touch the S1 button.)"NORM": Normal operation direction"REV" : Operation direction is reversed.

2. Move the cursor to the "STICK MODE" item
and touch the RTN button to switch to thedata input mode.
3. Select the mode. The display blinks. When
the RTN button is touched, the stick mode ischanged. (To terminate the mode change,
touch the S1 button.)
(J3)

(J2)
(J4)

Mode
1
2
3
4

-1
AileronAileronRudderRudder-2
Throttle
Elevator
Throttle
Elevator(J1)-3
Elevator
Throttle
Elevator
Throttle-4
RudderRudderAileronAileron<Functions of System Menu> 55

Stick calibration method*J3 and J4 correction is described below. J1 and J2
corrections are performed using the same procedure.

1.Select [CALIBRATION] and access the setup
screen shown below by touching the RTN
button.

Switch Position change method
1.Select [SWITCH] and access the setup screen
shown below by touching the RTN button.

2.Move the cursor to the switch to change.
And touching the RTN button.
2.Move the cursor to the -3--4 button andtouch the RTN button.

3. Select the position by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*The display blinks.

4.Touch the RTN button.
3.Move the -3 or -4 sticks to the neutral positionand press the RTN button for one second.

4.Set the -3 and -4 sticks fully to the bottom
right and wait until the buzzer sounds.

5.Set the -3 and -4 sticks fully to the top left andwait until the buzzer sounds.

6.The above completes the correction
operation. Operate and check if stickcorrection was performed normally.

56 <Functions of System Menu>

START SEL.

Immediately, a model selection can be performed

START SEL is a function which starts and canperform a model selection immediately.
Each time, it is convenient for the modeler
which is enjoying two or more models by one of atransmitter.

turned ON. With a few quick touches, it is possible
to change models whereas before it would requirea multi-step process. The FX-22 stores up to fourmodels in the Quick Select offerings.

Quick Select Screen

When the transmitter is turned on, it will open to
the Model Selection Screen immediately.

As the name suggests, the Quick Model SelectFunction enables the modeler to change theselected models rapidly each time the transmitter isModel Select Screen<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Systemmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode

RETURN

Setting Up and Adjusting the Quick Select Models
1. The Start Selection (START SEL.) menu isaccessed through the FX-22 System Menu.
Turn the transmitter ON and then press the
SYS (System) button two times. Use theSensorTouch to highlight the Start Selection(START SEL.) and then press the Return (RTN)
button to conÀrm the selection.

2.The Start Selection (START SEL.) menu option
defaults to OFF meaning that 4uick Selectand Model Select are not applicable. To
activate the 4uick Select or Model Select,
use the SensorTouch to scroll to the OFF
setting as denoted in the image. With the
OFF indication highlighted, press the Return(RTN) button and rotate the SensorTouch once
again to scroll amongst the options. With the
4uick Select (4UICK SEL.) indicated, press the
Return (RTN) button once again to make thedesired selection as indicated.

activated, there are two additional options available
for customization; ALWAYS and MDL (Model).
These options determine if/when the Quick Selectinformation will appear on-screen. ALWAYS,
as the name suggests, indicates that each time
the transmitter is powered-up, the Quick Selectinformation will appear on-screen. The MDL(Model) setting indicates that the Quick Selectinformation will appear on-screen only when
the MDL button is pressed simultaneously as thetransmitter is turned ON. With the Quick Selectmode highlighted, use the SensorTouch to move tothe activation setting options. Model (MDL) is thedefault setting. Press the Return (RTN) button tobring forth the options, then scroll to the ALWAYS
setting using the SensorTouch pad. Press the Return571 EXWWRQRQFHDJDLQWR¿QDOL]HWKHVHOHFWLRQ

Quick Select Activation:
With the Quick Select (QUICK SEL.) option<Functions of System Menu> 57

Model Select Screen
Assigning models to the sensor buttons:
There are four sensors/buttons that correspond This allows the Model Select screen to be accessedwith the SensorTouch: Link (LNK), Model (MDL) immediately upon turning ON the transmitter.
System (SYS) and S1. As such, it is possible to offer* Please note: this function cannot be utilized at the same timeas the Quick Select function. If more than four models are
up to four models available through the Quick SelectÀRZQUHJXODUO\ZHVXJJHVWWKDWWKH0RGHO6HOHFWIXQFWLRQEH
IXQFWLRQ:HVXJJHVWXVLQJWKHPRGHOVWKDW\RXÀ\utilized as it will save time when selecting the desired aircraft.
most often.
,IIRXURUIHZHUPRGHOVDUHÀRZQWKH4XLFN6HOHFWRSWLRQ
1. Use the SensorTouch, scroll to the desired
sensor/button for the Àrst model; for example,
Link (LNK).
2. With the input next to the desired sensor
highlighted, press the Return (RTN) button onetime.
3. Using the SensorTouch, scroll through theavailable models. To select the desiredmodel, press the Return (RTN) button.
4. Repeat as desired for the remaining sensors.

Using the sensors to select the model:
1. Turn ON the transmitter, activating the
4uick Select screen. If Model (MDL) has
been selected, please be sure to press the
Model (MDL) sensor when powering up thetransmitter.

would be the best choice.
* Please note: the Model Select function does not allow accessto the RENAME, COPY or DELETE options. To utilize oneof these options, please access the Model Select screen in
the typical manner as described in the complete instruction
manual.

1.The Start Selection (START SEL.) menu isaccessed through the FX-22·s System Menu.
Turn the transmitter ON and then press the
SYS (System) button two times. Use theSensorTouch to highlight the Start Selection(START SEL.) and then press the Return (RTN)
button to conÀrm the selection.
2. The Start Selection (START SEL.) menu option
defaults to OFF meaning that 4uick Selectand Model Select are not applicable. To
activate the 4uick Select or Model Select, use
the SensorTouch to scroll to the OFF setting as
denoted in the image. With the OFF indication
highlighted, press the Return (RTN) button androtate the SensorTouch once again to scroll
to the Model Select (MODEL SEL.). Press the
Return (RTN) button once again to activate
Model Select as indicated.

* Please note: Even if the Quick Select function is active, thePower Mode screen will appear when the transmitter is turned
ON while simultaneously pressing the Return (RTN) button.

2. To select the model assigned to a particularsensor, double-click the desired sensor. For
example, MODEL- 03 is assigned to S1, doubleclick S1 to bring forth all settings, etc. for Model-03. The FX-22 offers an audible and visualconÀrmation as the selected model memory ischanged accordingly.
* If the Return (RTN) button is double-clicked, the FX-22 thecurrent model is selected as indicated on the display. That is,
the model that was used prior to the last time the transmitter
was turned OFF.

58 <Functions of System Menu>

Model Select Activation:
With the Model Select (MODEL SEL.) option
activated, there are two additional options available
for customization; ALWAYS and MDL (Model).
These options determine if/when the Model Selectinformation will appear on-screen. ALWAYS,
as the name suggests, indicates that each time
the transmitter is powered-up, the Model Selectinformation will appear on-screen. The MDL(Model) setting indicates that the Model Selectinformation will appear on-screen only when
the MDL button is pressed simultaneously as thetransmitter is turned ON.
With the Model Select mode highlighted, use theSensorTouch to move to the activation setting
options. Model (MDL) is the default setting. Press
the Return (RTN) button to bring forth the options,then scroll to the ALWAYS setting using the
SensorTouch pad. Press the Return (RTN) button
RQFHDJDLQWR¿QDOL]HWKHVHOHFWLRQ

Using the Model Select Function:
1. Turn ON the transmitter, activating theModel Select screen. If Model (MDL) has
been selected, please be sure to press the
Model (MDL) sensor when powering up thetransmitter.
*Please note: Even if the Model Select function is active, thePower Mode screen will appear when the transmitter is turned
ON while simultaneously pressing the Return (RTN) button.

2. The SensorTouch is used to select amongst
the on-screen models. The current model
will automatically be highlighted when thetransmitter is turned ON. If a different model isdesired, use the SensorTouch to scroll throughthe available options; each highlighted
accordingly. Again, to select a model, press
the Return (RTN) button accordingly. The FX22 offers an audible and visual conÀrmation as
the selected model memory is changed.

<Functions of System Menu> 59

AUTO LOCKThe automatic lock function of two kinds of SensorTouch

The Auto Lock function makes it possible to lockthe transmitter to prevent any unwanted input from
\RXUKDQGVZKLOHÀ\LQJ
The auto lock function can be set in two ways.
LOCK TIMER
Auto Lock functions automatically when there
is no operation from the HOME/TELEM.MONI
screen display for a chosen number of seconds.

START LOCK
Auto Lock functions automatically when themodel changes or power is turned on.
*To temporarily allow access to the FX-22 programmingpress and hold the S1 or HOME/EXIT bitton for one second.
Please note, the Auto Lock function timer will resume
immediately once again.
*Also in a lock, the change of a HOME ⇔ TELEM.MONI
screen is possible with a HOME/EXIT button.

● Manual lockIf HOME/EXIT button is touched 1 secondor more from a HOME/TELEM.MONI screen,a SensorTouch locks manually.

● Manual lockIf S1 button is touched 1 second or morefrom a HOME/TELEM.MONI screen, a
SensorTouch locks manually.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Systemmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

RETURN

Auto lock method
1. Open the Auto lock screen in the systemmenu.

● Lock release
Every lock function's touch [ 1 secondor more ] of S1 button will release thelock.
● Lock release
Every lock function's touch [ 1 secondor more ] of HOME/EXIT button will
release the lock.

2. Adjust the activation timer for the Auto
Lock function. The timer will begin counting
immediately when the HOME screen is not
used. The timer is adjustable in one second
increments up to 30 seconds. If the timer
value is OFF, this function is not applicable.

● Display of a lockIf locked, there will be sound and theicon of a key will come out.

3.The Start Lock setting will, if enabled,
automatically lock the FX-22 when thetransmitter is powered up. To allow access tothe transmitter's functions, press and hold theS1 key for one second.

Danger
*If neither the Lock Timer or Start Lock functions are active(OFF), then the key lock remains even if the power is turned off.
*If the Lock Timer is enabled and the Start Lock is off, the key
lock status is canceled each time the FX-22 is turned on.

60 <Functions of System Menu>

It is recommended to Lock the
6HQVRU7RXFKGXULQJÀLJKWWRSUHYHQW
any accidental touches which couldchange settings and cause an accident.

Displays the program version, SD card information, and product ID.

INFOThe FX-22 system program version information,
SD card information (current and maximum
QXPEHURIPRGHOGDWDDQGRWKHU¿OHV DQGSURGXFWID are displayed on the Information screen.

The language displayed in home, menu, andsetup screen is selectable.

*When the SD card is not inserted, the SD card information is
not displayed.

ŏ Select [INFO] at the system menu and access the
setup screen shown below by touching the RTN
button.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Systemmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode

RETURN

Information"PRODUCT": Product ID number"RF ID": RF ID number"LANGUAGE": The language used in FX-22"VERSION": FX-22 system program version
information"AREA": Area which can use FX-22"CARD SI=E": Current/Maximum number ofmodel data and other Àles (SD card)

Language selection
1. Move the cursor to the "LANGUAGE" item
and touch the RTN button to switch to thedata input mode.
2. Change the language by scrolling the touch
sensor. The display blinks. When the RTN
button is touched, the language is changed.
(To terminate the change, turn the EDIT dialor push the S1 button.)<Functions of System Menu> 61

SBUS SERVO

SBUS servo setting.

An S.BUS servo can memorize the channel
and various settings you input. Servo setting
can be performed on the FX-22 screen by
wiring the servo as shown in the figure.

FX-22

ŏ Select [SOUND] at the system menu and accessthe setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Systemmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

S.BUS/S.BUS2
Servo<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode

RETURN

Servo ID number
Individual ID numbers are memorized for yourS.BUS(2) servos in your FX-22. When a servo isused, the servo ID number is automatically read by
the transmitter. If you use multiple S.BUS(2) servos
and do not want to change the settings on all that are
mounted in a fuselage, only the desired servo in the
JURXS FDQ EH VHW E\ HQWHULQJ WKH ,' RI WKDW VSHFL¿F
servo.

* After reading completion, with connection of the above¿JXUHLIDVWLFNLVPRYHGWKHWHVWRIRSHUDWLRQRIWKHVHUYR
can be operated and carried out.

* With some S.BUS(2) servos, there are some functions withcannot be used. If a function cannot be used, the display screen
will change.
(Only the function which can be used by a servo is displayed.)

Procedure for changing S.BUS servo setting
1. Select [S.BUS SERVO] of the System Menu.
2. Wire the servo as shown in the Àgure above.
3. Press [RECALL] on page 3(S1 is pushed twice).
The ID and current setting of that servo aredisplayed. ([RECALL] is chosen ⇒ RTN ispushed ⇒ RTN is pushed for 1 second)
4. When multiple servos are connected change[INH] at the right side of the ID number on thescreen to [ACT] and enter the ID of the servo
you want to set.
5. Set each item. (Please see the next page.)
6. Press [WRITE] on page 3([WRITE] ischosen ⇒ RTN is pushed ⇒ RTN is pushed for 1
second). The settings are changed.

62 <Functions of System Menu>

Push [INIT.], if you would like to initialize asetup of a servo. ([INIT.] is chosen ⇒ RTN ispushed ⇒ RTN is pushed for 1 second)

S.BUS Servo Description of function of each parameter*There are a function which can be used according to the kind of servo, and an impossible function.

• ID
Displays the ID of the servo whose parameters are to be read. It cannot be changed.

• Channel
Channel of the S.BUS system assigned to the servo. Always assign a channel before use.

• Reverse
The direction in which the servo rotates can be changed.

• Servo type
When “Retractable” is selected and the servo has been continuously stopped for 30 seconds, the dead band
expands and unnecessary hold current due to external force is eliminated. When a new control signal enters,
normal operation is resumed. When using the servo as a landing gear servo, select “Retractable”. Also adjust the
servo travel to match the landing gear movement range.

• Soft Start
Restricts operation in the speciﬁed direction the instant the power is turned on. By using this setting, the ﬁrst initial
movement when the power is turned on slowly moves the servo to the speciﬁed position.

• Stop Mode
The state of the servo when the servo input signal is lost can be speciﬁed. The "Hold" mode setting holds theservo in its last commanded position even if using AM or FM system.

• Smoother
This function changes smoothness of the servo operation relative to stick movement changes. Smooth setting isused for normal ﬂight. Select the "OFF" mode when quick operation is necessary such as 3D.

• Neutral Offset
The neutral position can be changed. When the neutral offset is large value, the servo's range of travel is restricted
on one side.

• Speed Control
Speeds can be matched by specifying the operating speed. The speed of multiple servos can be matched without
being affected by motor ﬂuctuations. This is effective for load torques below the maximum torque.
However, note that the maximum speed will not be exceed what the servo is capable of even if the servos
operating voltage is increased.

• Dead band
The dead band angle at stopping can be speciﬁed.
[Relationship between dead band set value and servo operation]
Small ĺ Dead band angle is small and the servo is immediately operated by a small signal change.
Large ĺ Dead band angle is large and the servo does not operate at small signal changes.
(Note) If the dead band angle is too small, the servo will operate continuously and the current consumption will
increase and the life of the servo will be shortened.

• Travel Adjust
The left and right travels centered about the neutral position can be set independently.

• BoostThe minimum current applied to the internal motor when starting the servo can be set. Since a small travel does
not start the motor, it essentially feels like the dead band was expanded. The motor can be immediately started byadjusting the minimum current which can start the motor.
[Relationship between boost set value and servo operation]
Small ĺ Motor reacts to a minute current and operation becomes smooth.
Large ĺ Initial response improves and output torque increases. However, if the torque is too large, operation will
become rough.

<Functions of System Menu> 63

• Boost ON/OFF
OFF : It is the boost ON at the time of low-speed operation.(In the case of usual)ON : It is always the boost ON.(When quick operation is hope)• DamperThe characteristic when the servo is stopped can be set.
When smaller than the standard value, the characteristic becomes an overshoot characteristic. If the value islarger than the standard value, the brake is applied before the stop position.
Especially, when a large load is applied, overshoot, etc. are suppressed by inertia and hunting may occur,depending on the conditions. If hunting (phenomena which cause the servo to oscillate) occurs even though theDead Band, Stretcher, Boost and other parameters are suitable, adjust this parameter to a value larger than theinitial value.
[Relationship between damper set value and servo operation]
Small ĺ When you want to overshoot. Set so that hunting does not occur.
Large ĺ When you want to operate so that braking is not applied. However, it will feel like the servo response has
worsened.
(Note) If used in the hunting state, not only will the current consumption increase, but the life of the servo will also
be shortened.

• Stretcher
The servo hold characteristic can be set. The torque which attempts to return the servo to the target position
when the current servo position has deviated from the target position can be adjusted.
This is used when stopping hunting, etc., but the holding characteristic changes as shown below.
[Relationship between stretcher and servo operation]
Small ĺ Servo holding force becomes weaker.
Large ĺ Servo holding force becomes stronger.
(Note) When this parameter is large, the current consumption increases.

• Buzzer
When the power supply of a servo is previously turned on at the time of a power supply injection without taking
transmit of a transmitter, the buzzer sound of about 2.5 Hz continues sounding from a servo.
(Even when the transmit of a transmitter is taken out previously, a buzzer becomes until the signal of a servo is
outputted normally, but it is not unusual.)

The transmitter has been turned OFF ahead of a servo power supply → The buzzer sound of about 1.25 Hz
continues sounding as servo power supply end failure alarm.
(Do not insert or remove the servo connector while the receiver power is ON. A buzzer may soundby incorrect recognition.)＊ Buzzer sound is generated by vibrating the motor of a servo.
Since current is consumed and a servo generates heat, please do not operate the number more than needed or
do not continue sounding a buzzer for a long time.

64 <Functions of System Menu>

FUNCTIONS OF LINKAGE MENU
The Linkage Menu is made up of functions
which perform model addition, model typeselection, system type, end point setting, and othermodel basic settings.

The functions which can be selected depend on
the model type. A typical menu screen is shown
below.

ŏ Access the Linkage menu shown below bytapping the LNK button two times.
<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor

ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏCalling setup screen

RETURN**The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.

ŏ Select the function you want to set and callthe setup screen by touching the RTN button.

Linkage Menu functions table[SERVO]: Displays the servo test and operation position[MODEL SEL]: Model addition, call, deletion, copy, model name setting[MODEL TYPE]: Model type, wing type, swash type, etc. selection[SYSTEM]: System mode selection, link of a transmitter and receiver, area mode selection[FUNCTION]: Channel assignment of each function can be changed[SUB-TRIM]: Adjusts the neutral position of each servo[REVERSE]: Reverses the servo travel direction[FAIL SAFE]: Fail safe function and battery fail safe function setting[END POINT]: Servo travel adjustment and limit setting[SERVO SPEED]: Speed setup of a servo[THR CUT]: Stops the engine safely and easily (airplane and helicopter only)[IDLE DOWN]: Lowers the idle speed of the engine (airplane only)>6:$6+5,1*@/LPLWVWKHVZDVKSODWHWUDYHOWRZLWKLQD¿[HGUDQJH KHOLFRSWHURQO\[SWASH]: Swash AFR and linkage correction function (helicopter only)[T1-T4 SET.]: Control step amount and mode selection of the digital trim
[WARNING]: Mixing warning normal reset[TELEM.SET.]: Displays voice software, and a setup of a voice interval.
[TELEMETRY]: Displays various data sent from the receiver.
[SENSOR]: Various telemetry sensors setting[DATA RESET]: Model memory set data reset<Functions of Linkage Menu> 65

SERVO MONITOR Servo Test

Graph Display / Displays servo positions.

This is used for testing servo movement.
“Moving Test” (repetition mode) and “Neutral
7HVW´ ¿[HGSRVLWLRQPRGH DUHDYDLODEOH
The “Neutral Test” is good for finding theneutral position of a servo horn.

In order to prevent any potential difficulties,
the servo test function will be inoperable, or
LQDFFHVVLEOHXQGHUFHUWDLQFRQGLWLRQV6SHFL¿FDOO\the Servo Test function is not operational if thethrottle cut is ON in either airplane or helicopter
modes; or if the throttle hold is ON in helicoptermode.

ŏ A [U.MENU/MON.] button is pushed once from ahome screen.
ŏ Select [SERVO] in the Linkage menu and accessthe setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

RETURN

Servo test operation
1. Move the cursor to the [OFF] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the test mode by scrolling the touch
sensor and touch the RTN button. The display
blinks. Touch the RTN button to change themode. (To terminate mode change, touch
the S1 button.)[MOVING]: Mode which repeats operation ofeach servo[NEUTRAL]: Mode which locks each servo inthe neutral position
2. Move the cursor to the [MOVING] or[NEUTRAL] item and touch the RTN button toswitch to the data input mode.
Select the [OFF] by scrolling the touch sensor
and touch the RTN button. Testing is stopped.

66 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode

MODEL SELECT

The Model Selection function performs model addition, selection,
deletion, copy, and model name setting.

This function is used to load the settings of thedesired model into the FX-22’s memory.
The settings may be selected from either thetransmitter’s internal memory or an SD card.
Remember that up to 30 model memories are available
in the transmitter.
The name of the model stored in the transmitter andthe SD card may be changed. This can be very usefulto tell different models settings apart. Each model namecan be as long as 10 characters, and the model namealways appears in the display screen.

The Copy function is used to copy parameters,
settings, etc. from one model data into a second
memory. It may be used for getting a head-start on
setting up models with almost the same settings (only
GLIIHUHQFHVQHHGWREHPRGL¿HGLQVWHDGRIHQWHULQJWKH
complete model from scratch). Also, this function may
be used to make a backup copy of a model setup before
any changes are made.
*FX-22 can use the model data of FX-20 for SD card,
copying it. However, the model data of FX-22 cannot be
used by FX-20.

ŏ Select [MODEL SELECT] in the Linkage menu
and access the setup screen shown below by
touching the RTN button.

Current model<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode

RETURN*The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.

(Model list)

Model selection

Model addition*Model data saved on the transmitter memory other than themodel currently used can be selected.

*A new model can be added to the transmitter memory. It can
not be added to the SD card.

1. Move the cursor to the save destination
display ("TX" or "CARD") and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the save destination by scrolling thetouch sensor and touch the RTN button.
[TX]: Transmitter memory[CARD]: SD card
2. After moving the cursor to the desired modelin the model list, touch the RTN button.
3. Move to [SELECT].
4.Touch the RTN button. A confirmation
message is displayed. Touch the RTN button
for one second and selection is complete.

1. Move the cursor to [NEW].
2. Touch the RTN button. A confirmation
message appears. Touch the RTN button for
one second.

*The model type setup screen and frequency setup screen are
DXWRPDWLFDOO\GLVSOD\HG&RQ¿UPRUFKDQJHWKHPRGHOW\SH
and SYSTEM mode.
*Transmission stops and then starts in the new model.
*The added model appears in the model list of the model
select setup screen.

*Link is required when a new model ismade from a model selection.
*Transmission stops and then starts in the new model.

<Functions of Linkage Menu> 67

Model deletion*The model stored in the transmitter memory or an SD card
can be deleted.
*The current model can not be deleted.

1. Move the cursor to the save destination
display ("TX" or "CARD") and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the save destination by scrolling thetouch sensor and touch the RTN button.
[TX]: Transmitter memory[CARD]: SD card
2. Move the cursor to the model you want todelete in the model list and then touch the
RTN button.
3. Move the cursor to [DELETE].
4. Touch the RTN button. When a conÀrmation
message is displayed and the RTN button
is touched for one second, the model isdeleted.

Model name change*The model name of the model stored in the transmitter
memory or a SD card can be changed.

1. If changing the location:
Move the cursor to the save destination
display ("TX" or "CARD") and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the save destination by scrolling thetouch sensor and touch the RTN button.
[TX]: Transmitter memory[CARD]: SD card
2. Move the cursor to the model you want tochange in the model list and then touch the
RTN button.
3. Move to [RENAME].
4. Touch the RTN button.
*The model name setup screen is displayed.
User name (candidate)[Adding a character]
When a character is selected from thecharacter list and the RTN button is touched,that character is added at the position
immediately after the cursor.
*A name of up to 10 characters long can be entered as themodel name. (A space is also counted as one character.)

6. After the desired information has been input,
select [ENTER] and touch the RTN button.
(To terminate input and return to the originalstate, select [CANCEL] and touch the RTN
button.)Model copy
*A copy can be made of the model stored in the transmitter
memory or an SD card.

1. If changing the location:
Move the cursor to the save destination
display ("TX" or "CARD") and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the save destination by scrolling thetouch sensor and touch the RTN button.
[TX]: Transmitter memory[CARD]: SD card
2. Select the model you want to copy in themodel list and then touch the RTN button.
3. Move to [COPY].
4. Touch the RTN button.
*The copy screen appears.

5. I f r e p l a c i n g t h e m o d e l s t o r e d i n t h etransmitter memory:
Move to [ADD-LIST] and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode.
Select the destination model by scrolling thetouch sensor and touch the RTN button.
[ADD-LIST]: adding the model to the list[(model name)]: replacing the model*The model stored in the SD card can be replaced.

5. Change the model name as described
below:[Moving cursor in the user name (candidate)]
Select [ł] or [ń], and touch the RTN button.
[Deleting a character]
When [DELETE] is selected and the RTN button
is touched, the character immediately after
the cursor is deleted.

68 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

If changing the location:
Move the cursor to the copy destination
display ("TX" or "CARD") and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the save destination by scrolling thetouch sensor and touch the RTN button.
6. Move to [COPY].
7. Touch the RTN button. When a conÀrmation
message is displayed and the RTN button istouched for one second, the model data is
copied.

MODEL TYPE

This function selects the model type from among airplane, helicopter,and glider.

Six swash types are available for helicopters.
Six types of main wings and three types of tailwings are available for airplanes and gliders.
Functions and mixing functions necessary for eachmodel type are set in advance at the factory.
Note: The Model Type function automaticallyselects the appropriate output channels,
control functions, and mixing functions for the
chosen model type.
When the Model Type selection commandis accessed, all of the data in the active
memory is cleared (except the following
swash type.) Be sure that you don’t mind

losing this data, or back it up to anothermemory using the copying functions.
When changing the helicopter swash typewithin the following groups, you can leave
the settings other than the SWASH function.
However, this is initialized when you change
the swash type to the other swash typegroup.
Swash type group A:
H-1, H-3, HR3, and HE3
Swash type group B:
H-4, H-4X

ŏ Select [MODEL TYPE] in the Linkage menu andaccess the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.

<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode

RETURN(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)

Model type selection
1. Move the cursor to the item you want tochange and touch the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode.
Select the desired type by scrolling thetouch sensor and touch the RTN button. A
confirmation message appears. Touch the
RTN button for one second.
Move to [YES] and Touch the RTN button for
one second.
(To terminate input and return to the originalstate, touch the S1 button or select [NO] andtouch the RTN button.)"TYPE": Model type
"WING " (airplane/glider): Wing type
"TAIL" (airplane/glider): Tail type
"SWASH" (helicopter): Swash type

2. If resetting the data when changing thehelicopter swash type:(Helicopter)

Move the cursor to [OFF] and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select [ON] by scrolling the touch sensor
and touch the RTN button. A confirmation
message appears. Touch the RTN button.
Activate the swash type setting. The swash
setting parameters are reset.

*The wing types which can be selected depend on the mode;
FASST, Multi-ch, or 7ch, etc.

<Functions of Linkage Menu> 69

Model type selection (Airplane, Glider)
Ɣ:LQJW\SH 1RUPDO

Ɣ:LQJW\SH 7DLOOHVVZLQJ

Ɣ5XGGHUW\SH

Ɣ7DLOW\SH

Model type selection (Helicopter)
Ɣ6ZDVKW\SH

70 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

SYSTEM

System mode setting, Receiver link

System Type selection
The FX-22 is for 2.4GHz only. The system canbe changed from among 5 choices: FASSTest
1 4 C H , FA S S Te s t 1 2 C H , FA S S T M U LT I ,FASST 7CH, S-FHSS. It is FASSTest14CH andFASSTest12CH which can be chosen by R7008SB
set. The method of selection is to the next page.
*If you change the System Type, other model data is notreset.
*If a system type is changed in helicopter mode, thetransmitter will offer two selections:[Yes] : Selection sets the channel order suitable for System
Type. (We recommend here. )[No] : The present channel order is maintained.
*After any change, remember to test the model and should
fully check servo direction and a motion.
*Analog servos cannot be used with the R7008SB in the

FASSTest 12CH mode.

Dual receiver function (only FASSTest 14CH
mode)
Dual receivers can be linked with the FX-22.
Two receivers are recognized individually by ID
numbers. For example, in R7008SB, CH output
setting function is used, by setting the first as as"1-8CH", and setting the second as "9-14CH", twosets of receivers can be used as a set in the model,
allowing you 14 channels. If a Dual receiver
function is used, the following function can set up
individually.
・Battery fail-safe voltage setup
A telemetry function cannot be used for the 2ndreceiver. The voltage and Ext voltage of a 2nd
receiver cannot be known with a transmitter.

ŏ Select [SYSTEM] in the Linkage menu and accessthe setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode

RETURN

Area mode selection (Frequency range)
The FX-22 transmitter has been designed tofunction in many countries. If you will be utilizing
this transmitter in a country other than France,
please make sure that [AREA] is set to "G". If,
however, this transmitter will be utilized in France,
it must be set to "F" in order to comply with French
regulations.FASST mode selection
Receiver linking
The receiver will only be controlled (without
being affected by other transmitters) by thetransmitter it is linked to. When using a receiver
other than one purchased as a set, linking isnecessary.
Moreover, a re-link is required when a newmodel is added by model selection, and the time ofsystem type change.
Linking method
P.35

Cases when linking is necessary:
・When using a receiver other than the initial setting.
・When the communication system was changed.
(FASSTest14CH ↔ FASSTest12CH etc. )・When a new model was created by model
selection.

Battery fail-safe voltage setup (only FASSTest
mode)
The voltage which battery fail-safe activates,
can be set when you link. (3.5-8.4V) The receiver
memorizes the setting as it was at link.
Suggested setting voltages are as follows.
• 4 cells NiCd or NiMH (Normal: 4.8v) = 3.8 v• 2 cells LiFe (Normal: 6.6 v) = 6.0 ~ 6.2 v• 2 cells LiPo (Normal: 7.4 v) = 7.2 ~ 7.4 v
It is a rough reference value.
Since it changes with servos carried in thecondition and the model of a battery, please set toyour own model in a battery consumption current.
<Functions of Linkage Menu> 71

Telemetry function (FASSTest mode only)
To use the telemetry function, set “Telemetry”
to “ACT”.
DL Interval (FASSTest mode only)
When a telemetry function is enabled, thereceiving interval (down-link interval) of sensor
data can be changed.
If a DL interval is increased, the response of
the sensor data display becomes slower, but stick
response will improve.
System Type selection procedure
1. Move the cursor to the [FASSTest-14CH]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.

3. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment andreturn to the cursor mode.

Area mode selection (Frequency range)
procedure
1. Move the cursor to the [G] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.

2. Select the [G]or[F] by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*"F" is chosen only when using the transmitter is used in
France. Leave this in "G" otherwise.

3. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment andreturn to the cursor mode.

Telemetry ACT/INH procedure

2. Select the system type by scrolling thetouch sensor.
[FASSTest-14CH][FASSTest-12CH][FASSTMULT][FASST-7CH][S-FHSS]*An example of selections for each system is on thefollowing page.

3. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

Dual receiver function (only FASSTest 14CHmode) procedure
1. Move the cursor to the [SINGLE] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.

2. Select the [SINGLE] or [DUAL] by scrolling
the touch sensor.
ID of a Primary
receiver displays.

ID of a Secondary
receiver displays.

In DUAL, a primary receiver is link previously.
Next, a secondary receiver is link.

72 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

1. Move the cursor to the TELEMETRY [ACT] item
and touch the RTN button to switch to thedata input mode.

2. Select the [ACT]or[INH] by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment andreturn to the cursor mode.

DL Interval set procedure
1. Move the cursor to the TELEMETRY DL[1.0s]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.

2. Select the DL time by scrolling the touch
sensor. If a DL interval is increased, theresponse of the sensor data display becomesslower, but stick response will improve.
Initial value: 1.0s
Adjustment range : 0.1s~2.0s
3. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment andreturn to the cursor mode.

The example for choosing System Type-Response speed haspriority over numberof channels-Want to use apreviously used
receiver as is-Want to use aminiature receiver
for indoor planes-Want to use an
S-FHSS systemminiature receiver-Telemetry requires
only the current
receiver battery

FASST 7CH

-Want to use more channels-Want to use a large numberof telemetry functions

FASST MULTIFASSTest 12CH
FASSTest 14CH

R7008SB
R7003SB

R7008SB
R7003SB

R608FS
R6008HS
R6108SB
R6208SB
R6014HS
R6014FS
R6203SB
R6203SBE
R6202SBW
R6303SB
R6303SBE

R617FS
R6004FF
R616FFM
R6106HF
R6106HFC
R6203SB
R6203SBE
R6202SBW
R6303SB
R6303SBE

S-FHSSR2006GS
R2106GF
R2008SB(Usable receivers)(The time of August, 2013)

System Type■ FASSTest 14CH --- FASSTest system receiver mode. Applicable with the telemetry sensor unit. Up to
14 channels (linear 12+ON/OFF2) can be used.
■ FASSTest 12CH --- FASSTest system receiver mode. Applicable with receiver voltage display. Up to 12channels (linear10+ON/OFF2) can be used. Telemetry Sensor cannot be used, but
the response speed is a faster than that of the 14CH mode.
• Analog servos cannot be used with the R7008SB in the FASSTest 12CH mode.
■ FASST MULTI--- FASST-MULTI system receiver mode. Up to 14 channels (linear 12+ON/OFF2) canbe used.

■ FASST 7CH--- FASST-7CH system receiver mode. Up to 7 channels can be used.

■ S-FHSS--- S-FHSS system receiver mode. Up to 8 channels can be used.

Receiver link method in FASST and S-FHSS
If the receiver of FASST and S-FHSS is used, themethods of a link differ.
1. Bring the transmitter and the receiver close toeach other, within 20 inches (half meter).
2. Turn on the transmitter .
3. Turn on the receiver .
4. Press and hold the Link switch more thantwo(2) seconds. When the link is complete,
the LED in the receiver changes to solid
green. When the ID cannot be read due tothe surrounding environment, try reading itwith the transmitter and receiver antennas
touched.
*Follow the manual of the receiver to be used.
Moreover, carry out an operating check.

<Functions of Linkage Menu> 73

FUNCTION

Channel assignment of each function can be changed.

When you select model and wing (swash) types,
you will find that the optimized combinations ofservo output channels and functions have been
already preset. If you would like, you can freelychange combinations of servo output channels,
functions (aileron, elevator, etc), and control (sticks,
switches, and trim levers).
*You can also assign the same function to multiple servo
output channels such as assigning elevator function to CH2
and CH3.

Channel Replacement
When the channel is replaced in the Function
menu, replaced channel uses the setting data (ATV,SUB-TRIM, REVERSE, F/S, and B-F/S, etc.).
Servo Output Channels
For FASSTest 14CH mode, you can set 12 linear
channels and two digital channels. For FASSTest
12CH mode, you can set 10 linear channels andtwo digital channels. For FASST MULT mode, you
can set 12 linear channels and two digital channels.

For FASST 7CH mode, you can set only 7 linear
channels. For S-FHSS mode, you can set only 8linear channels.
*DG1/2 (digital channels)
These channels can function as switched channels. You canfreely change combinations between servo output channels
and input controls (sticks, switches, and trim levers).

Motor Function
If you have either a Glider or Airplane Model
Type selected, and choose to activate the Motorfunction, a reverse setting screen is displayed.
*If YES is selected, the output is reversed. If NO is selected,
the output is normal.

:DUQLQJ
As a safety precaution to prevent the motor
from starting unexpectedly, please switch
off the motor accordingly. We also suggest
removing the propeller from the motor as anadditional precaution.

ŏ Select [FUNCTION] in the Linkage menu andaccess the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.

ŏ Trim operation mode
"COMB": Combination mode
"SEPAR": Separate mode
It sets up by T1-T4 SET of LINKAGE MENU.
<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURN(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)

Function change

Operation control change

1. Move the cursor to the function item of thechannel you want to change and touch the
RTN button.

1. Move the cursor to the "CTRL" item of thechannel you want to change and touch the
RTN button.

*The function selection screen is displayed.

*The control selection screen is displayed.

2. Move the cursor to the function name youwant to set and touch the RTN button.
*The function name blinks.

3. Touch the RTN button to execute thechange. (When you want to cancel thisoperation, touch the S1 button.)*Multiple channels can be assigned to one function.

2. Move the cursor to the control you want tochange, and touch the RTN button.
*The same control can be assigned to multiple channels.

74 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

&DPEHU0RWRU%XWWHUÀ\FRQWUROVHWWLQJ JOLGHU&DPEHUPRWRUEXWWHUÀ\IXQFWLRQFRQWUROFDQEHFKDQJHGIRU
each condition.

Camber, motor or butterfly control group/
single setting is performed at the function
setup screen.
"G": Group (common to all conditions)"S": Single (set for each condition)

Trim settingMove the cursor to the "TRIM" item of thechannel you want to change and touch the
RTN button.

Touch the RTN button to change the mode.
(To terminate input and return to the originalstate, touch the S1 button.)[NORM]: Normal mode. Normal trim (parallel
shift trim) operation.
[ATL]: ATL operation mode. Maximum
change near idle or low-stick position,
normally used with throttle trim. It is also
possible to reverse the travel.
*[NORMAL]/[REVERSE] selection is possible in "ATL"
mode.

Throttle trim (helicopter only)* The throttle trim in conditions other than "normal" condition
can be inhibited.

*The trim setup screen is displayed.

When other than normal condition is
selected, move the cursor to throttle trim on
the function setup screen and touch the RTN
button for 1 second.

The following items can be set at the trim
setup screen:*When "X" is displayed, THR trim is inhibited in conditions
other than normal condition.

Trim selection
Move the cursor to the trim, lever, etc. youwant to set and touch the RTN button.
*The setting can be changed.

Trim rate settingMove the cursor to the [RATE] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Set the trim rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 30Adjustment range : -150~150

Channel replacement
Move the cursor to the channel # you want
to replace and touch the RTN button toswitch to the data input mode.
Select the destination channel # by scrolling
the touch sensor. A confirmation message
appears. Touch the RTN button to replace
the channel. (To terminate input and returnto the original state, touch the S1 button.)(When the RTN button is touched for one second, the trim
rate is reset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end adjustment andreturn to the cursor mode.

Trim mode selection
Move the cursor to the [MODE] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the trim mode by scrolling the touch
sensor. A confirmation message appears.

<Functions of Linkage Menu> 75

SUB-TRIM

Setting of neutral position of each servo.

The Sub-Trim function is used to set the servo
neutral position, and may be used to make fineadjustments to the control surface after linkages
and pushrods are hooked up. When you begin to set
up a model, be sure that the digital trims are set totheir center position.
ŏ Select [SUB-TRIM] in the Linkage menu and accessthe setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Adjusting value

RETURN(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)

Sub-trim adjustment
1. Move the cursor to the channel you want toadjust and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
2. Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -240~240 (steps)(When the RTN button is touched for one second, sub-trim isreset to the initial value.)*Before sub-trim adjustment, it is very important to adjust thelinkages at the control surface so that you do not use subtrim, except for very minute adjustments.

3. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment andreturn to the cursor mode.
4. Repeat this procedure for each channel.

76 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

REVERSE

Use to reverse the throw direction.

Servo Reverse changes the direction of anindividual servo’s response to a control input.
For CCPM helicopters, be sure to read thesection on Swash AFR before reversing any servos.
With CCPM helicopters, always complete yourservo reversing prior to any other programming.
If you use pre-built Airplane/Sailplane functions
that control multiple servos, it may be confusing

to tell whether the servo needs to be reversed or asetting in the function needs to be reversed. See theinstructions for each specialized function for further
details. Always check servo direction prior to everyÀLJKWDVDQDGGLWLRQDOSUHFDXWLRQWRFRQ¿UPSURSHU
model memory, hook ups, and radio function.

ŏ Select [REVERSE] in the Linkage menu and accessthe setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode

RETURN(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)

Servo reversing procedure*Upon setup completion of a new model, check whether or
not each servo is connected to the correct channel.
*Next, determine whether you need to reverse any channels
by moving each stick and/or other control inputs.

1. Move the cursor to the channel you want toreverse and touch the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode.
2. Select the direction by scrolling the touch
sensor. A conÀrmation message appears.
[NORM]: Normal[REV]: Reverse
3. T o u c h t h e R T N b u t t o n t o c h a n g e t h e
direction. (To terminate input and return tothe original state, touch the S1 button.)*Repeat the operation above for each channel that must be
reversed.

<Functions of Linkage Menu> 77

FAIL SAFE

Sets the servos operating position when transmitter signals can nolonger be received or when the receiver battery voltage drops.

The Failsafe function may be used to set up
positions that the servos move to in the case ofradio interference.
You may set either of two positions for eachchannel: Hold, where the servo maintains its lastcommanded position, or failsafe, where each
servo moves to a predetermined position. You may
choose either mode for each channel. (FASST 7CH
mode: CH3 only)
The FX-22 system also provides you with anadvanced battery monitoring function that warns
you when the receiver battery has only a little
power remaining. In this case, each servo is moved
to the defined failsafe position. (FASST 7CH
mode: CH3 only) The battery failsafe may bereleased by operating a predefined control on thetransmitter (default is throttle), do not continue
to fly, land as soon as possible. Remember, if thepredefined control suddenly moves to a position
you did not command, land at once and check yourreceiver battery.
'H¿QHVVHUYRSRVLWLRQZKHQVLJQDOVDUHORVWDQG
when receiver battery voltage becomes low.

:DUQLQJ
For safety, always set the fail safe functions.
Ɣ5HPHPEHUWRVHWWKHWKURWWOHFKDQQHOIDLOVDIHIXQFWLRQVRWKDWthe servo moves to the maximum slow side for airplanes andto the slow side from the hovering position for helicopters.
Crashing of the model at full high when normal radio waves
cannot be received due to interference, etc., is very dangerous.
Ɣ,IWKHEDWWHU\IDLOVDIHLVUHVHWE\WKHWKURWWOHVWLFNLWPD\
be mistaken for an engine malfunction and will be reset at
WKURWWOHVORZDQGWKHPRGHOZLOOFRQWLQXHWRÀ\,I\RXKDYH
any doubts, immediately land.

ŏ Select [FAIL SAFE] in the Linkage menu and accessthe setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.

(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

RETURN

Fail safe setting procedure
1. Move the cursor to the "F/S" item of thechannel you want to set and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
2. Select the F/S mode by scrolling the touch
sensor. A conÀrmation message appears.
*The display blinks.

3. Touch the RTN button. (Touch the S1 button
to stop setting.)*The channel switches to the F/S mode.

4. Move the cursor to the "POS" item.
Hold the corresponding stick, knob, slider,etc. in the position you want the servo
to move to when the fail safe function is
activated and touch the RTN button for one
second.
*The set position is displayed in percentage.
*If you want to return that channel to the hold mode, movethe cursor to the "F/S" item and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Select the F/S mode by
VFUROOLQJWKHWRXFKVHQVRU$FRQ¿UPDWLRQPHVVDJHDSSHDUV
and then change the mode by touching the RTN button.

78 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

ŏ To next page

Battery fail safe setting procedure
Battery fail safe can be set for each channel
by the same method as the fail safe setting
procedure. Select and set the "B.F/S" item.
[ON]: Battery fail safe function ON[OFF]: Battery fail safe function OFF

Battery fail safe release switch settingThis function temporarily releases the battery
fail safe function, so the fuselage canrecover after the battery fail safe function
was activated by a drop in the receiverbattery voltage. This setting selects the switch
which releases the battery fail safe function.
1. Move the cursor to the [RELEASE B.F/S] item inthe setup screen (last page).
2. Touch the RTN button.
*The switch selection screen is called.
*For a detailed description of the switch selection and ON/
OFF direction setting method, see [Switch Setting Method]at the back of this manual.

END POINT

Sets the travel and limit point of each servo.

The End Point function adjusts the left and right
servo throws, generates differential throws, andwill correct improper linkage settings.
The travel rate can be varied from 0% to 140%
in each direction on channels 1 to 12(FASSTest
12CH mode). Also, the limit point where servo
throw stops may be varied from 0% to 155%.
ŏ Select [END POINT] in the Linkage menu andaccess the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.

(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURN(limit point)(limit point)(travel)(travel)Servo travel adjustment
1. Move the cursor to the travel icon of thechannel you want to adjust and touch the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
2. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 100
Adjustment range: 0~140
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.

Touch the RTN button to end adjustment andreturn to the cursor mode.
3. Repeat this procedure for each rate.

Limit point adjustment
1. Move the cursor to the limit point icon of thechannel you want to adjust and touch the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
2. Ajust the limit point by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 135
Adjustment range: 0~155
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the limit
point is reset to the initial value.

Touch the RTN button to end adjustment andreturn to the cursor mode.
3. Repeat this procedure for each limit point.

<Functions of Linkage Menu> 79

SERVO SPEED

Sets the speed of each servo.

The speed of the servo from 1CH to 12CH ofoperation can be set up.
It can adjust to 0-27.
Speed becomes slow as a numerical value's 0
increases in the state of the fastest of the servo.

* It will overlap, if speed control of a S.BUS servo setup is
used at the time of S.BUS servo use, and speed changes.
Please use one either.
* The speed of THR is not set up simultaneously with THR
DELAY (model menu : only airplane).

* Speed cannot be made quicker than the maximal rate of theservo to be used.

ŏ Select [SERVO SPEED] in the Linkage menu andaccess the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.

(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Adjusting value

ŏ To next page

RETURN(speed)(channel)(speed)Servo speed setting
1. Touch the Speed button of the channel you
want to set.
2. Use the adjustment buttons to adjust the
servo speed.
ŏInitial value: 0ŏAdjustment range: 0~27 (steps)*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.

3. Repeat this procedure for each channel.

80 <Functions of Linkage Menu>(channel)Stops the engine safely and easily.(airplane and helicopter only)

THR CUT

Throttle cut provides an easy way to stop theengine. Generally speaking, modelers will do so
E\ÀLSSLQJDVZLWFKZLWKWKHWKURWWOHVWLFNDWLGOH
The action is not functional at high throttle to
avoid accidental dead stick landings. The switch’s
location and direction must be chosen, as it defaults
to NULL.
Individually adjust the throttle cut activation
setting for each condition. (helicopter)*Since conditions are not offered when an airplane is selected,
the throttle cut options will vary from the options noted
below.
*The throttle cut POS and SW settings are utilized for all
conditions.
*If the throttle cut switch is activated, or on, this status willcontinue even if the condition is changed to an inhibited
setting.
*If the condition is inhibited (INH) the throttle cut is off if the
SW is in the off position and the throttle stick is low.

ŏ Select [THR CUT] in the Linkage menu and accessthe setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.

<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

RETURNŏ Current throttle position

Throttle cut setting procedure
1. Activate the function:
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.

ŏ Cut position*With the selected cut switch ON and the throttle stick at idle;
adjust the rate until the engine consistently cuts off.
However, be sure that the throttle linkage is not pulled tootight or unreasonable force is not applied to the servo.

ŏ Individually adjust the Throttle Cut activation
setting for each condition. (helicopter)ŏ Throttle
cut status*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to activate thefunction and return to the cursor mode.
2. Switch selection:
Move the cursor to the [SW] item and accessthe switch setup screen by touching the
RTN button and select the switch and ON
direction.
*For a detailed description of the setting method, see [Switch
Setting Method] at the back of this manual.

3. Throttle cut position setting:Move the cursor to the [POS] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the servo operation position at throttle
cut operation by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 17
Adjustment range: 0~50
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

Designating a throttle cut setting position.
(helicopter)*A throttle cut function acts in the low side of the throttle
position.
*"THRO" setting is common with all condition.

:DUQLQJ
Normal setting is slightly above idle.
1. To add the throttle cut position, use thecursor to select the THRO percentage
desired, then press and hold the RTN button
for one second.
ŏ Throttle
cut status
ŏ Throttle
stick position<Functions of Linkage Menu> 81

Lowers the engine idling speed.(airplane only),'/('2:1

The Idle Down function lowers the engine toits idle position. Like throttle cut, this is usually
DFFRPSOLVKHGE\ÀLSSLQJDVZLWFKZLWKWKHWKURWWOH
stick at idle. The action is not functional at highthrottle to avoid accidental dead sticks. The
switch’s location and direction must be chosen, as
it defaults to NULL.
ŏ Select [IDLE DOWN] in the Linkage menu andaccess the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

RETURNŏ Current throttle position

Idle down setting procedure
1. Activate the function:
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to activate thefunction and return to the cursor mode.
2. Switch selection:
Move the cursor to the [SW] item and accessthe switch setup screen by touching the RTN
button. Select the switch and ON direction.
*For a detailed description of the setting method, see [Switch
Setting Method] at the back of this manual.

3. Offset rate setting:Move the cursor to the [OFFSET] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Adjust the servo offset rate at idle down
operation by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -100~0~100

82 <Functions of Linkage Menu>* When a minus rate is input, an offset is applied at the highside.
*Maximum offset amount is near maximum slow.
* When the RTN button is touched for one second, the offset
rate is reset to the initial value.

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

6:$6+5,1*

Limits the swash plate travel to within a Àxed range. (Helicopter only)This function limits the swash travel to a fixed
range in order to prevent damaging the swash
linkage by simultaneous operation of the ailerons
and elevators. It is very useful in 3D aerobatics
which use a large travel.
ŏ Select [SWASH RING] in the Linkagemenu and access the setup screen
shown below by touching the RTN
button.

ŏ When the swash ring function is activated,a circle is displayed in the operating
range display area and the rate input box
is displayed. Stick operation is limited tothe area of this circle.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

RETURNŏ The operating range display area:
The vertical direction shows theelevator travel. The horizontal
direction shows the aileron travel.

ŏ The marker shows the
stick position.

Swash ring setting procedure
1. Activate the function:
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to activate thefunction and return to the cursor mode.
2. Rate setting:Move the cursor to the [RATE] item touch the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
Set the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 100.
Adjustment range: 50 to 200.
*Adjust the rate to maximum swash tilt.
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.

Touch the RTN button to end adjustment andreturn to the cursor mode.

<Functions of Linkage Menu> 83

6:$6+

Swash AFR and linkage correction function. (helicopter only, except
swash type H-1)

Neutral Point
At your linkages, if the servo horn deviates froma perpendicular position at neutral, the linkage
compensation functions in this menu may notcompensate effectively. To correct this use the
Neutral Point function. This will move the neutral
point of the servos to the actual perpendicular
position. However, this adjustment changes only
the axis point of the compensation functions in thismenu, and does not affect the neutral position ofother functions.
Swash AFR
Swash AFR function reduces, increases, orreverses the rate (travel) of the aileron, elevator andcollective pitch functions, by adjusting or reversing
the motion of all servos involved in that function,
only when using that function.
Mixing Rate
This mixing is used to compensate the swashplate as necessary during specific control inputs.

The following compensation mixing is possible;
PIT to AIL, PIT to ELE, AIL to PIT, ELE to AIL,
and ELE to PIT (HR3 mode.) It adjusts the swashplate to for proper operation of each control using
the corresponding compensation mixing.
Linkage Compensation
This compensation mixing is used to correct theswash-plate for pitch control at low pitch and highpitch.
Speed Compensation
This function is used to cancel the reaction thatis generated by the difference in the movements ofeach servo when the swash-plate moves.
Subtrim
Subtrim for aileron, elevator and pitch can be set
during swash setting.
Pitch adjustment function+LJKQHXWUDODQGORZSLWFK¿[HGRXWSXWVFDQEH
used while adjusting the pitch.

ŏ Select [SWASH] in the Linkage menu and accessthe setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

RETURN

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

ŏ To next page

Neutral point setting procedure

Swash AFR setting procedure

The neutral point becomes the correction
standard point.

The swash AFR function makes adjustments so
WKDWWKHVHUYRVWUDYHOWKHVSHFL¿HGDPRXQWE\>$,/@
[ELE], and [PIT] operation.

*Adjusting the servo horn so that the neutral point is near the
50% position makes the mixing amount small.

1. Neutral point settingMove the cursor to the [POS] item and holdthe pitch operation so that the servo horn is
at a right angle to the linkage rod and Touch
the RTN button for one second. This value
indicates the servo's neutral position.
After reading the neutral point, use theother correction functions to make further
adjustments.

84 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

1. Move the cursor to the function you want toadjust and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
2. Adjust the AFR rate by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 50Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the AFR
rate is reset to the initial value.

Touch the RTN button to end adjustment andreturn to the cursor mode.

Mixing rate setting procedure
The HR3 swash-plate type will be used as an
example to describe mixing rate setting. The mixing
used in other swash modes may be different,
however, the setting procedure is the same.

*Set the throttle stick to the preset neutral point. Adjust thelength of the linkage rod so that the swash plate is horizontal
at this position.
*The sub-trim function can be used to make small
adjustments.

*When making the following setting, move the cursor to theitem you want to set and touch the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode. Touch the RTN button to end
adjustment and return to the cursor mode.

1. Compensating aileron input [AIL]
Set the throttle to the lowest position. Movethe aileron stick to the left and right andadjust the aileron compensation amountso that interference in the elevator or pitch
direction is minimal.

*Adjust so that the pitch curve is a straight line and thehelicopter achieves maximum pitch.

*Adjust by scrolling the touch sensor.

*Move the cursor to the item you want to adjust and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input mode. Touch
the RTN button to end adjustment and return to the cursor
mode.

*If the interference increases when the compensation amount
was increased, make adjustments with the direction [DIR.]
using the plus "+" or minus "-".

1. Adjusting the aileron operation [AIL to PIT]
Adjust the AIL to PIT rate so there is no binding
in the elevator or pitch movement when theaileron stick is moved to the left and right.
*Adjust by scrolling the touch sensor.
*The left and right sides can be adjusted individually.

2. Adjusting the elevator operation [ELE to AIL]/[ELE to PIT]
Adjust the ELE to AIL and ELE to PIT rates sothere is no binding in the aileron or pitch
movement when the elevator stick is moved
up and down.
*Adjust by scrolling the touch sensor.
*The up and down sides can be adjusted individually.

3. Adjusting the pitch operation [PIT to AIL][PIT
to ELE]
Adjust the PIT to AIL and PIT to ELE rates sothat the swash plate moves to the level/
horizontal position when the throttle stick was
moved to maximum low and full high.

*The left and right sides can be adjusted individually.

2. Compensating elevator input [ELE]
Adjust the elevator compensation amountso that the aileron or pitch direction
interference when the elevator stick was
moved up and down is minimal.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 above, perform aileronand elevator compensation similarly at full
throttle.

Speed compensation setting procedure
1. Move the cursor to the "SPEED" item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Set the throttle stick to the neutral point
position. 4uickly move the elevator stick andadjust the speed compensation amount[SPEED] for minimum interference in the pitch
direction.
*Adjust by scrolling the touch sensor.

Touch the RTN button to end adjustment andreturn to the cursor mode.

*Adjust by scrolling the touch sensor.
*The slow and high sides can be adjusted individually.

Linkage compensation setting procedure*Prior to utilizing the linkage compensation settings, it isimportant to adjust the mixing rate settings.
*Linkage compensation overrides interference from theaileron operation with the elevator or elevator operation
with the aileron at collective pitch control for low pitch andhigh pitch.

<Functions of Linkage Menu> 85

Subtrim setting procedure
Subtrim can be set on the last page of the swash
setting screen.

*The sub-trim value set here is reflected at sub-trim of thelinkage menu.

Pitch adjustment procedure
The pitch adjustment function can be used on thelast page of the swash setting screen.
1. Call the last page of the swash setting
screen.
2. W h e n t h e c u r s o r i s m o v e d t o a p i t c hadjustment button and the RTN button istouched, the corresponding pitch is output.
* In the pitch adjustment mode an * is displayed at the left
side of the current output setting button.
*If the cursor is moved to another button and the RTN button
is touched during pitch adjustment, the pitch adjustmentmode is deactivated.

Function details are as follows:
ButtonHigh
NeutralLow
Moving

FunctionHigh pitch Àxed output mode
Neutral pitch Àxed output modeLow pitch Àxed output mode
Cyclic pitch output mode

*The cyclic pitch speed can be set with the button at the rightside of the “Moving” button.

Setting range: 1 to 100*When the set value is large, motion becomes fast and when
the set value is small, motion becomes slow.

86 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

T1-T4 SET.

Digital trim settings

This function adjusts the digital trim's stepamount and operation mode (T1~T4.)
When the flight conditions are set, the trim
operation can be coupled with the conditions whencombination mode is selected.
The FX-22 unit of trim is displayed on the home
screen.

Only the trim displayed on the home screen canbe moved to the center position without changing
the actual trim's memory position.

ŏ Select [T1-T4 SET.] in the Linkage menu and accessthe setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.

ŏ Trim operation mode
"COMB.": Combination mode
"SEPAR": Separate mode
<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURN(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)

Control step amount setting

Display unit selection

1. Move the cursor to the [STEP] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
2. Set the control step amount by scrolling thetouch sensor.
Initial value: 4Adjustment range: 1~200

1. Move the cursor to the [UNIT] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the mode by scrolling the touch
sensor. A conÀrmation message appears.

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the control
step amount is reset to the initial value.
*When the value is increased, the change per step becomeslarger.

3. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment andreturn to the cursor mode.

Separate/combination mode selection (Heli and
Glider only)
1. Move the cursor to the [MODE] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the mode by scrolling the touch
sensor. A conÀrmation message appears.
*The display blinks.

[COMB.]: Combination mode. The trim's data
is reÁected in all Áight conditions.
[SEPAR]: Separate mode. Trim adjustments
are made individually for each flight
condition.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)*The display blinks.

[--]: A step number is displayed on the home
screen. There is no unit display.
[ ]: "" is displayed as a unit.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)Trim Memory Operation procedure
1. Move the cursor to the [T1-T4 MEMORY] item
and touch the RTN button to switch to thedata input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor. A conÀrmation message appears.
*The display blinks.
[INH]: Inhibited[ACT]: Activated
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)4. At the home screen, move the cursor to thetrim you want to change and touch the RTN
for one second. The trim display is moved tothe center position.
*When the function is inhibited, the trim position returns to
the actual trim position.

<Functions of Linkage Menu> 87

:$51,1*

Low battery alarm voltage set warning normal reset

The FX-22 includes an audible alarm that sounds
when the transmitter’s battery voltage drops below
a pre-determined setting; adjustable for cell types
and voltages.
Mixing warning at power ON can be reset to
OFF.

:DUQLQJGLVSOD\Airplane: Throttle cut/Idle down/Throttle
position/Snap-roll/Motor position/Airbrake/
Motor
Helicopter: Condition/Throttle cut/Throttle
position/Throttle Hold
Glider: Condition/Motor position/Trim-mix/Motorŏ Select [WARNING] in the Linkage menu andaccess the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.
<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏ Push S1 button to advance to next page.

Accessing and Activating the Low Battery
Alarm
1. T h e l o w b a t t e r y ( L O W B A T T E R Y ) a l a r m
voltage is accessed through the FX-22·s
System Menu. Within the System Menu, use
the SensorTouch to highlight the soundoption and then press the return (RTN) button
to conÀrm the selection.
2. Use the SensorTouch to scroll to the low
battery (LOW BATTERY) alarm, and then press
the return (RTN) button to access the voltage
settings. Using the SensorTouch, adjust thevoltage as desired and/or determined by thetransmitter battery pack being utilized. The
voltage options range from 6.0V to 7.6V.
*When HT6F1800B is used :It is not necessary to change from 7.2V of initial setting.
Setting to low voltage is dangerous.
*About low battery voltage, all the models included in one
transmitter are changed in common. It cannot set to different
voltage for every model. Moreover, data reset is not carriedout.

88 <Functions of Linkage Menu>:DUQLQJQRUPDOO\UHVHWWLQJPHWKRG
1. Move the cursor to the item you want toreset to OFF and touch the RTN button toswitch to the data input mode.
2. Select the OFF mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*The display blinks.

3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)TELEM.SET.

Displays voice software, and a setup of a voice interval*The Speech function can only be used with headphones
plugged into the earphone plug.
*You will need to purchase headphones or earphones with a
3.5plug.

This screen is related with the speech oftelemetry.
The kind of voice software installed in FX22 ofyou is displayed.
Moreover, the interval which reproduces a soundis set up.
*The language chosen for the Speech data will affect only the
Speech function. It will not change the language used in thetransmitter's text display.

EarphonePlugŏ Select [TELEM.SET.] in the Linkage menu andaccess the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.
<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏ The speech language installed isindicated. When the speech data is notinstalled, "----------" is displayed.
In order to change a speech language,
it is necessary to install speech data fromthe WEB site of Futaba.
Refer to the WEB site for details.

ŏ The version No. of the speech dataÀle is indicated. When the speech
data is not installed, nothing isdisplayed.
ŏ The interval of speech can be set.
The setting range is from 0 [Sec] to 30 [Sec].

[LINKAGE MENU][sensor type］[data］［unit]［data］［data］［data］［data］
Ex. Rx battery「battery」「seven point four」「volt」「seven point four」「seven point four」「seven point four」「seven point
four」[TELEMETRY]*If the telemetry data is changed frequently, the speech data will
not be the same as the displayed data.How to hear telemetry

How to hear telemetry data with a speech.
1. The alarm setting screen of each sensor is
opened to page 2nds.

data with a speech.

[Sensor to set up][2/2 page]

How to hear telemetry alert with a speech.
ACT/INH button

ON/OFF switch

2. Move the cursor to "INH" beside "SPEECH".
3. It scrolls and makes it "ACT".
4. Touch the RTN button.
5. Switch selection:
Move the cursor to the [--] item and accessthe switch setup screen by touching the RTN
button. Select the switch and ON direction.
*For a detailed description of the setting method, see [Switch
Setting Method] at the back of this manual.
*In "--", it always gives a speech.

6. The volume of an earphone is adjusted
by [SYSTEM MENU] → [SOUND] → [PHONE
VOLUME].

When the ALERT button is ACT from alarm
setting screen, the speech function works when
the alert occurs.
*The format of the speech output is"warning" [sensor type］[data］［unit］
Ex. Rx battery「warning」「battery」「four point zero」「volt」*If the telemetry data is changed frequently, the speech data will
not be the same as the displayed data.

How to change speech interval
1. Move the cursor to "INTERVAL" time.
2. Select the time by scrolling the touch sensor.
*The display blinks.

3. Touch the RTN button.

*The format of the speech output is<Functions of Linkage Menu> 89

TELEMETRY

Displaying data from the receiverThis screen displays your choice of data from thereceiver.
Also warnings can be activated regarding
other data from your aircraft. For example, if thereceiver voltage drops, the user can be warned byan alarm (and vibration).
ŏ [TELEMETRY] can be called if the HOME/EXIT button
is pushed from a home screen.
ŏ Select [TELEMETRY] in the Linkage menu andaccess the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.
*A telemetry function cannot be used for the 2nd receiver ofdual receiver mode. The voltage and Ext voltage of a 2nd
receiver cannot be known with a transmitter.

ŏ Receiver -! Transmitter. The
reception strength is shown.
<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏ Push S1 button to advance to next page.

Telemetry date
1. Telemetry screen can be called if the HOME/
EXIT button is pushed from the home screen.
Or select [TELEMETRY] in the Linkage menu
and access the setup screen by touching
the RTN button.
2. If each item is chosen and the RTN button ispushed, an alarm setup can be performed
with the minimum/maximum after atransmitter is turned on.
*Receiver voltage can be checked immediately. An optional
sensor will need to be attached to S.BUS2 of a receiver if
you would like to see other information.

*No special setup is necessary if each sensor displayed
is left as in the default setup. Separate sensor ID
is also unnecessary. However, if two or more of
one kind of sensor is used, setup is required in the"SENSOR" menu.

90 <Functions of Linkage Menu>:DUQLQJ
Do not watch the transmitter screen duringÀLJKW
<RXPD\ORRVHVLJKWRIWKHDLUFUDIWGXULQJÀLJKWDQGWKLVLV
extremely dangerous. Have an assistant on hand to checkthe screen for you. A pilot should NEVER take his eyes off
his aircraft.

How to see Telemetry data
The telemetry screen is modiÀed.
It pushes fromHOME screen.

3. You will use the "Display" function to choose
how many sensors are shown on yourTelemetry monitor.

To TELEMETRY MONITOR

You can display any items on the telemetry screen
up to 4 items at FASSTest 14CH mode. The benefitof expansion of a character will be obtained bychoosing the display items 1 and 2.
Ex. 1 item is displayed

1

1

2

Ex. 2 items are displayed

I f t h e n u m e r i c p a r t In FASSTest12CH mode,( i n c l u d e d " + " , " - " , " , " ) they are only 1 and 2 item
is over the 6 letters, it displays.
becomes the smaller size
automatically. It is same
size as 2 items screen.
Ex. 3 items are displayed[ Display position ]

1

3

2

4

4. If you want to show two sensors on yourTelemetry screen, select 2 in "Display". Thenmove down to the Sensor to select which
other item is shown.

Ex. 4 items are displayed

When using a sensor that has two or morefunctions, you will want to scroll to selectwhich will be displayed. (ALTITUDE,VARIO,etc.)

TELEMETRY MONITOR set up
1. The HOME/EXIT button is pushed from HOME
screen and TELEMETRY MONITOR is called.

5. If you want to show three sensors on yourTelemetry screen, select 3 in "Display". Thenmove down to the Sensor to select which
other item is shown.
6. To SENSOR " ----------" selection will reduce a
display item.

2. M o v e t h e c u r s o r t o t h e " R E C E I V E R " o r"SENSOR" (SBS-XXX etc.) and touch the RTN
button.

If a cursor is moved to items (Rx-BATT,
EXT-VOL, TEMP. etc.) and RTN is touched,
the alarm setting screen of the item will be
displayed.

1
2

3

1
2

<Functions of Linkage Menu> 91

TELEMETRY : Rx-BATT.

Displaying data from the receiver battery voltage

In this screen, the battery voltage of a receiver isdisplayed.
If it becomes higher or lower than the setting an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.

ŏ Select [Rx-BATT.] in the TELEMETRY screen andaccess the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.

ŏ The maximum and the minimum whenpowering ON are shown.
ŏ Receiver battery voltage<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏ ŅThe "down" arrow will
indicate that an alarm willsound when the voltage
drops to below the setting.

Alert set
1. Move the cursor to the ŅALERT [INH] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)4. Move the cursor to the ŅTHRESHOLD [4.0V]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 4.0V
Adjustment range: 0.0V~8.4V*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.

6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)92 <Functions of Linkage Menu>"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter will
vibrate during the warning.

TYPE 1
TYPE 2TYPE 3
TYPE 4TELEMETRY : EXT-VOLT

Displaying data from the EXT battery voltage port

*CA-RVIN-700 or SBS-01V must be installed in the aircraft.
The EXT-VOLT screen will display the data fromthe EXT-battery output from the R7008SB receiver.
In order to use this function, it is necessary toconnect external voltage connector of the R7008SB
receiver to a CA-RVIN-700 (FUTM5551) or
SBS-01V to the battery you desire to measure thevoltage of.

You will be alerted by an alarm or vibration if
the voltage set by you is exceeded.

ŏ Select [EXT-VOLT] in the TELEMETRY screen andaccess the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage will be received in
the FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest14CH mode will display all telemetry data.

ŏ The maximum and the minimum whenpowering ON are shown.
ŏ EXT battery voltage<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏAn alarm is activated,even when the input
voltage is 0V (whenset to 0V).

ŏ ŅThe arrow will indicate thatan alarm will sound whenthe voltage drops to below
the setting.

Alert set
1. Move the cursor to the ŅALERT [INH] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)4. Move the cursor to the ŅTHRESHOLD [4.0V]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 4.0V
Adjustment range: 0.0V~100.0V

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter will
vibrate during the warning.

TYPE 1
TYPE 2TYPE 3
TYPE 4*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.

6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)<Functions of Linkage Menu> 93

TELEMETRY : TEMP.

Displaying data from the temperature*A temperature sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.

TEMP is a screen which displays/sets up
the temperature information from an optionaltemperature sensor.
The temperature of the model (engine, motor,
EDWWHU\HWF ZKLFKLVÀ\LQJFDQEHGLVSOD\HG
If it becomes higher or lower than the setting an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.
ŏ Select [TEMP.] in the TELEMETRY screen and accessthe setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.

ŏ The maximum and the minimum whenpowering ON are shown.
ŏ Temperature<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏ Ń An upward arrow will ŏPress the S1 button to advance to the next page.
show that an alarm
will sound when thetemperature rises above
the set value.
ŏ Ņ A downward arrow
will show that an alarm
will sound when thetemperature drops
below the set value.

"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, thetransmitter will vibrate during the warning.

TYPE 1
TYPE 2TYPE 3
TYPE 4

Alert set : Hot warning

Alert set : Low-temperature warning

1. Move the cursor to the ŃALERT item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)4. Move the cursor to the ŃTHRESHOLD [100℃ ]item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 100℃
Adjustment range: -19℃ ~200℃(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)

1. 2/2 page is accessed by pushing S1. Movethe cursor to the ŅALERT item and touch the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)4. Move the cursor to the ŅTHRESHOLD [0 ℃ ]item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0℃
Adjustment range: -20℃ ~199℃(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.

6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)

6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)94 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

Displaying data from the RPM

TELEMETRY : RPM*A RPM sensor must be installed in the aircraft.

RPM is a screen which displays / sets up the
RPM information from an optional RPM sensor.
The RPM of the model (engine, motor, etc.)
ZKLFKLVÀ\LQJFDQEHVKRZQIf it becomes higher or lower than the setting an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.
ŏ Select [RPM] in the TELEMETRY screen
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.

ŏ The maximum and the minimum whenpowering ON are shown.
ŏ RPM<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏ ŃAn upward arrow
indicates that the ŏPress the S1 button to advance to the next page.
alarm will soundwhen the RPM rises
above the set value.

"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, thetransmitter will vibrate during the warning.

TYPE 1
TYPE 2ŏ ŅA downward arrow
indicates that thealarm will soundwhen the RPM falls
below the set value.
ŏ"MAGNETIC" or "OPTICAL"
is set according to thesensor you use.
SBS-01RM : MAGNETIC
SBS-01RO : OPTICAL

TYPE 3
TYPE 4

ŏ In "MAGNETIC", the gear ratioof your engine (motor) you areusing is entered.

ŏ In "OPTICAL", the number of
blades of the propeller ( r o to r ) your model is entered.

Alert set : Over rotations

Alert set : Under rotations

1. Move the cursor to the ŃALERT item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)4. M o v e t h e c u r s o r t o t h e Ń T H R E S H O L D[2000rpm]item and touch the RTN button toswitch to the data input mode.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 2000rpm
Adjustment range: 1rpm~150,000rpm(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)

1. Scroll to the second page by pushing S1.
Move the cursor to the ŅALERT item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)4. Move the cursor to the ŅTHRESHOLD [0rpm]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0rpm
Adjustment range: 0rpm~149,999rpm(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.

6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.

6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)<Functions of Linkage Menu> 95

TELEMETRY : ALTITUDE

Displaying data from the altitude*Altitude sensor or GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
ALTITUDE is a screen which displays / sets up thealtitude information from an optional altitude sensor or*36VHQVRU7KHDOWLWXGHRIWKHPRGHOZKLFKLVÀ\LQJFDQ
be known. If it becomes higher (low) than preset altitude,
you can be told by alarm. To show warning by vibration
can also be chosen. Data when a power supply is turned
on shall be 0 m, and it displays the altitude whichFKDQJHGIURPWKHUH(YHQLIWKHDOWLWXGHRIDQDLU¿HOGLV
high, that shall be 0 m and the altitude difference from anairfield is displayed. This sensor calculates the altitude
from atmospheric pressure. Atmospheric pressure will
get lower as you go up in altitude, using this the sensor
will estimate the altitude. Please understand that an exact
advanced display cannot be performed if atmosphericpressure changes in a weather situation.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.

ŏ Select [ALTITUDE] in the TELEMETRY screen and access the
setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

ŏ The maximum and the minimum whenpowering ON are shown.
ŏ Altitude<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏ Ń A n u p w a r d a r r o w ŏPress the S1 button to advance to the next page.
indicates the alarm willsound when the altitude
reaches above your set
value.

ŏ Ņ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thealtitude reaches
below your set value.

"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, thetransmitter will vibrate during the warning.

TYPE 1
TYPE 2TYPE 3
TYPE 4First, the set of a reference is required.
1. The model and transmitter to which thealtitude sensor was connected are turned on.
2. Move the cursor to the [SET] of "REFERENCE"
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input andreturn to the original state, touch the S1 button.)*Atmospheric pressure is changed according to the weather also
DWWKHVDPHDLU¿HOG<RXVKRXOGSUHVHWEHIRUHDÀLJKWAlert set : High side
1. Move the cursor to the ŃALERT item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)4. Move the cursor to the ŃTHRESHOLD [200m]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 200m
Adjustment range: -499m~5,000m(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)

96 <Functions of Linkage Menu>*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.

6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)Alert set : Low side
1. Scroll to the second page by pushing S1. Movethe cursor to the ŅALERT item and touch the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)4. Move the cursor to the ŅTHRESHOLD [-50m]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: -50m
Adjustment range: -500m~4,999m(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.

6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input andreturn to the original state, touch the S1 button.)

TELEMETRY : VARIO

Displaying data from the variometer*Altitude sensor or GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
status, the FX-22 incorporates a different melody
VARIO is a screen which displays / sets up thefor ascent and descent. Additionally, depending
variometer information from an optional altitude
upon the rate of climb or descent, the tones vary to
sensor or GPS sensor.
indicate whether or not the airplane is climbing or
7KHYDULRPHWHURIWKHPRGHOZKLFKLVÀ\LQJFDQ
descending at a rapid rate.
be known.
If it becomes higher or lower than the setting an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.
To ensure that the pilot is aware as to the model'sŏ Select [VARIO] in the TELEMETRY screen and accessthe setup screen shown below by touching the RTN
button.

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.

ŏ The maximum and the minimum whenpowering ON are shown.
ŏ Variometer<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏ Ń An upward arrow ŏPress the S1 button to advance to the next page.
indicates the alarm
will sound when thealtitude reaches
above your set value.
ŏ Ņ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thealtitude reaches
below your set value.

ŏ Melody function switch display.
When the cursor is moved tothis option and the RTN button
is pushed, the display changes
to the switch selection screen.
When the melody function is
active, ´onµ is displayed. Whenthe melody function is set to INH
or the switch is OFF, nothing isdisplayed.

● The vario melody outputs
from the phone jack.

ŏ If this is set to ACT, a melody will be activated during the riseor dive, depending on your set values. The melody function
can be turned on and off with the speciÀed switch.

The priority of the phone output is below;
Speaking Alarm >> Speaking data >> Vario Melody(High priority)(Low priority)

Alert set : Rise side

Alert set : Dive side

1. Move the cursor to the ŃALERT item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)4. Move the cursor to the ŃTHRESHOLD [0m/s]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0m/s
Adjustment range: -49m/s~50m/s(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)

1. Scroll to the second page by pushing S1.
Move the cursor to the ŅALERT item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)4. Move the cursor to the ŅTHRESHOLD [0m/s]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0m/s
Adjustment range: -50m/s~49m(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.

6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.

6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input andreturn to the original state, touch the S1 button.)<Functions of Linkage Menu> 97

TELEMETRY : BATTERY

Displaying data from the battery voltage

In this screen, the battery voltage is displayed.
In order to use this function, it is necessary toconnect external voltage connector of R7008SB ⇔SBS-01V ⇔ Battery
SBS-01V measures two batteries. The drive
battery connected to two lines is displayed on EXTVOLT. The battery for receivers connected to 3Plines is displayed here.
ŏ Select [BATTERY] in the TELEMETRY screen andaccess the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.

*SBS-01V must be installed in the aircraft.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.

ŏ The maximum and the minimum whenpowering ON are shown.
ŏ battery voltage<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏ ŅThe arrow will indicate thatan alarm will sound whenthe voltage drops to below
the setting.

Alert set
1. Move the cursor to the ŅALERT [INH] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)4. Move the cursor to the ŅTHRESHOLD [4.0V]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 4.0V
Adjustment range: 0.0V~8.4V*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.

6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)98 <Functions of Linkage Menu>"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter will
vibrate during the warning.

TYPE 1
TYPE 2TYPE 3
TYPE 4TELEMETRY : DISTANCEThe Distance screen displays and sets altitude
data from an SBS-01G GPS Sensor (soldseparately), and allows the distance to the airborne
aircraft to be read by the transmitter. When theaircraft flies inside or outside the set distance analarm and vibration alerts the pilot.

Displaying data from the Distance Screen*A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
*The GPS sensor is necessary, and is sold separately. Mountand connect the sensor in accordance with the sensor
instruction manual.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.

ŏThis indicates the receiving accuracy from a GPS satellite. When
three bars are displayed, the GPS is ready for use. Pushing[REFERENCE] sets the current aircraft position as the starting point. ŏ T h i s i n d i c a t e s M a x i m u mDistance the aircraft Áew to.
ŏ Select [DISTANCE] in the TELEMETRY screen and accessthe setup screen shown below by touching the RTNŏCurrent distancebutton.
<SensorTouch™>*
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏPress the S1 button to advance to the next page.
ŏ The Ńarrow showsthat an alarm isgenerated when
the set value is
exceeded.

ŏDistance alarm setting range
1m 〜 5,000m*Alarm when the aircraft moves far
away.
(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, thetransmitter will vibrate during the warning.

ŏ The Ņarrow showsthat an alarm isgenerated when
the distance drops
below the set value. ŏDistance alarm setting range 0m 〜 4,999m(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)

Setting the reference position
1. Turn on the transmitter and the model with
the GPS sensor installed in it.
2. Wait for the GPS accuracy indicator todisplay three bars.
3. Move the cursor to REFERENCE [SET] andtouch the RTN button. The models current
position is now stored and the distance is set
to 0 yd.
4. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input andreturn to the original state, touch the S1 button.)*Now, the position of the present model was set to 0 m.

Setting a "too far" alert distance
1. Move the cursor to the ŃALERT item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1TYPE 1
TYPE 2TYPE 3
TYPE 4

button.)4. Move the cursor to the ŅTHRESHOLD [1,000m]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Adjust the distance by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.

6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)*Positioning time of GPS
A short time is required until the positioning of
the GPS is established. In the meantime, don't
PRYH WKH PRGHO GXULQJ WKLV SURFHVV:DLW XQWLO
the GPS sensor's LED turns solid green. If it isblinking green it is still acquiring the satellites
signals.

<Functions of Linkage Menu> 99

Setting a "too close" alert distance.
1. Access the second page by pushing S1.
Move the cursor to the ŅALERT item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)4. Move the cursor to the ŅTHRESHOLD [0yd]item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.

6. Touch the RTN button.

ŏ Selecting Surface or Slant distances [DISTANCE] in the TELEMETRY screen bytouching the RTN button once and the S1 button twice.

*ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode

RETURNŏCurrent position display.
N: North latitude
E: East longitudeŏAltitude calculated aseither straight line
distance (slant) or surface
distance on a map canalso be selected
(3/3)

nt

Sla

AltitudeSurface

Two distance calculation methods are available
Surface (straight line distance), and Slant may be
selected.
1. Select page 3 by touching the S1 button twicefrom the ´DISTANCEµ screen.
2. Select SLANT! SURFACE! next to ´MODEµ,scroll either to the desired method and touch
the RTN button.

100 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

TELEMETRY : SPEED
The speed screen displays and sets the speed datafrom an SBS-01G (GPS sensor) sold separately.
The speed of the aircraft during flight can bedisplayed.
After flight, the maximum speed during flight
can be viewed. Because this speed is based on
position data from a GPS satellite, the ground speed

Displaying data from the speed*A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
is displayed instead of air speed. Consequently,
with a head wind, the displayed speed decreases
and with a tail wind, the displayed speed increases.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.

ŏ Select [SPEED] in the TELEMETRY screen and access the
setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

ŏ Displays the maximum speed after
the transmitter is turned on.
ŏDisplays the current speed<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page
RETURNŏPress the S1 button to advance to the next page.
ŏ The Ń arrow showsthat an alarm isgenerated when
the speed exceeds
the set value.
ŏ The Ņ arrow showsthat an alarm isgenerated when
the speed drops
below the set value.
ŏSpeed alarm setting range 0 〜 499km/h(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)*Alarm when the speed has decreased.

ŏSpeed alarm setting range
1 〜 500km/h(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)*Alarm when the speed has increased.

"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, thetransmitter will vibrate during the warning.

TYPE 1
TYPE 2TYPE 3
TYPE 4

2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
1. Set ´ŃALERTµ on the SPEED! screen to ACT.
and return to the original state, touch the S1Move the cursor to INH and touch the RTN
button.)button.
4.The speed at which an alarm is generated
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
can be set by selecting the numerical display
sensor.
next to ´ Ņ THRESHOLDµ and touching the RTN
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
button. This sounds an alarm when the speed
and return to the original state, touch the S1
decreases.
button.)
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
4. The speed at which an alarm is generated can *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset
be set by selecting the speed display next to ´Ńto the initial value.
THRESHOLDµ and touching the RTN button. This 6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1generates an alarm when the speed increases.
button.)
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset *Speed alarm precaution
to the initial value.
Since the GPS speed sensor displays the ground speed, it cannot
6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
be used as a stall alarm. For example, an aircraft that stalls
and return to the original state, touch the S1
at 50km/h will stall if the tailwind is 5km/h or greater evenbutton.)through 55km/h is displayed by ground speed. In addition,

Alert setting when speed increases

Alert setting when speed decreases
1. Select page 2 by pressing S1 from the SPEED!
screen and set ´ Ņ ALERTµ to ACT.

ZLWKDQDLUFUDIWWKDWZLOOGLVLQWHJUDWHLQPLGÀLJKWDWNPKDW
an over-speed alarm, when the headwind reaches 30km/h theairplane will disintegrate in midair due to over speeding even ata ground speed of 370km/h.

<Functions of Linkage Menu> 101

TELEMETRY : CURRENT, VOLTAGE,CAPACITY
Compatible with the Robbe current sensor (F1678).
The current, voltage and battery capacity can bedisplayed. Please read the current sensor instruction
manual for more information.

Displaying data from the battery*Robbe Current sensor CURR-F1678
must be installed in the aircraft.

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.

ŏ [TELEMETRY] can be called if the HOME/EXIT button is pushed from a home screen.
ŏ Select [TELEMETRY] in the Linkage menu and access the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.

（Example of registration at slot No. 16）

ŏ Select [CURRENT-CURR-1678] in the TELEMETRY screen and accessthe setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

ŏ Select [CAPACITY-CURR-1678]
the TELEMETRY screen and1678] iin th
d accessthe setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

ŏ Select [VOLTAGE-CURR-1678]
678] in the TELEMETRY screen and accessthe setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

ŏPress the S1 button to advance to the next page.
*Refer to the another page for each setup.

102 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

Various telemetry sensors setting

SENSOR

This screen registers the telemetry sensors usedwith the transmitter. When only one of a certain
type of sensor is used, this setting is unnecessary
and the sensor can be used by simply connecting itto the S.BUS2 port of the transmitter.
When using 2 or more of the same kind of
sensor, they must be registered here.
ŏ Select [SENSOR] in the Linkage menu andaccess the setup screen shown below by
touching the RTN button.

>:KDWLVDVORW"@
Servos are classified by CH, but sensors areclassified in units called “slot”. There are slots
from No. 1 to No. 31.
Altitude sensors, GPS sensors and other data
sensor units may use multiple slots.
Using a sensor which uses two or more slots,
the required number of slots is automaticallyassigned by setting up a start slot.
When 2 or more of the same kind of sensor areused, the sensors themselves must allocate unused
slots and memorize that slot.
<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor

ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page
RETURNŏ Sensor ID: When multiple sensors of thesame type are not used, ID is unnecessary.

*3 slots of altitude sensor are used.
*8 slots of GPS sensor are used.

ŏ As shown
below, an altimeter requires 3 contiguous slots
n in the table below
and a GPS sensor requires 8 contiguous slots. In addition, since the GPS(SBS-01G) start slots are 8, 16, and 24, slots 6 and 7 are inhibited.

＜ Assignable slot ＞ *Altimeter, GPS, and other sensors that display a large amount of data require multiple slots.
*Depending on the type of sensor, the slot numbers that can be allocated may be limited.

Sensor
TEMP (SBS-01T)
RPM (SBS01RM,SBS01RO)
Voltage (SBS-01V)

The required
number of slots
1 slot1 slot2 slots

Altitude (SBS-01A)

3 slots

GPS (SBS-01G)
TEMP125-F1713

8 slots
1 slotVARIO-F1712

2 slots

VARIO-F1672

2 slots

GPS-F1675

8 slots

CURR-F1678

3 slots

The number which can be used as a start slot

Selling area

1 〜 31
1 〜 31
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,20,21,
22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,24,2
5,26,27,28,29
8,16,24
1 〜 31
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,20,21,
22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,20,21,
22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
8,16,24
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,24,2
5,26,27,28,29

GlobalEurope<Functions of Linkage Menu> 103

SENSOR : RELOAD

This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.

When using multiple sensors of the same typethe sensors must be registered in the transmitter.
Connect all the sensors to be used to the FX-22 as
VKRZQLQWKH¿JXUHDWWKHULJKWDQGUHJLVWHUWKHPE\
the following procedure. The ID of each sensor isregistered in the transmitter.

3-way hubor Y-harnesses);SENSORSENSORSENSORSENSORSENSORŏ Call page 7 by touching the S1 button 6 times fromthe [SENSOR] menu.

All the sensors to be used are connected.

<SensorTouch™>

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor

ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURN

Reading all the sensors to be used
1. Connect all the sensors and receiverbatteries to be used to the FX-22 through a
hub as shown in the Àgure above.
2. Move the cursor to ´RELORDµ on page 7 of
the [SENSOR] screen.
3. Touch the RTN button.
All the sensors are registered and can beused.

SENSOR : REGISTER This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.

Additional sensor registration
1. Connect the sensor and receiver battery to
be used to the FX-22 through a hub as shownin the Àgure at the right.
2. Move the cursor to ´REGISTERµ on page 7 ofthe Sensor! screen.
3. Touch the RTN button.
The sensor is registered and can be used.
*When the number of slots needed in registration is
LQVXI¿FLHQWDQHUURULVGLVSOD\HGDQGUHJLVWUDWLRQFDQQRWEH
performed. Disable unused slots or perform the following
relocate.

104 <Functions of Linkage Menu>);

SENSOR

This function registers an additional sensor.
Connect the sensor as shown in the figure at theright and register it by the following procedure.
The sensor ID is registered in the transmitter.

SENSOR : RELOCATE This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.
This function secures contiguous unused slots
by rearranging the registration state when sensor
registration and deregistration are performed
repeatedly and the unused slots are fragmented.

3-way hubor Y-harnesses);SENSORSENSORSENSORSENSORSENSORŏ Call page 7 by touching the S1 button 6 times fromthe [SENSOR] menu.

All the sensors to be used are connected.

<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor

ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURN

Relocate of sensors to be used
1. Connect all the sensors and receiverbatteries to be used to the FX-22 through a
hub as shown in the Àgure above.
2. Move the cursor to ´RELOCATEµ on page 7 of
the [SENSOR] screen.
3. Touch the RTN button.

SENSOR : SET SLOTThis page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.

This procedure changes the slot No. of one
registered sensor.
Sensor slot change);

SENSOR

1. Connect the sensor and receiver battery to
be changed to the FX-22 through a hub asshown in the Àgure above.
2. Move the cursor to ´SET SLOTµ on page 7 ofthe Sensor! screen.
3. Touch the RTN button. A sensor details screen
appears.
4. Move the cursor to ´LOADµ and touch the
RTN button.
5. The current start slot is displayed. Move thecursor to the number of the start slot andchange it to the desired value.（Cannot be
set to a slot that cannot be allocated like thetable of all pages.）
6. Move the cursor to ´WRITEµ and touch the
RTN button.

<Functions of Linkage Menu> 105

DATA RESET

Model memory setting data reset.

This function is designed to allow you to reset
trim settings or all of the settings saved in the activemodel memory. You may individually choose toreset the following data;
T1~T4:
Reset the digital trim setting.
*The trim step amount and trim rate are not reset.

ŏ Select [DATA RESET] in the Linkage menu andaccess the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.
ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Linkagemenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

RETURN

Data resetting method
1. Move the cursor to the item you want toreset and touch the RTN button.
$FRQ¿UPDWLRQPHVVDJHDSSHDUV

2. Execute reset by touching the RTN button for
one second. (Touch the S1 button to cease
resetting.)[T1-T4]: Resets only the T1-T4[ALL MODEL SETTING]: Resets all Linkage andModel Menu functions except for system
and low battery voltage, Model Select andModel Type.
[TELEMETRY]: Resets only the teremetryfunctions.

106 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

All model setting:Resets all Linkage and Model Menu functions
except for system and low battery voltage, Model
Select and Model Type.
*If the Model Type selected is Glider, the motor function
channel is automatically reversed in the Reverse menu; allother channels remain normal.

TELEMETRY:
Reset the telemetry setting.

<SensorTouch™>

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor

MODEL MENU (COMMON FUNCTIONS)This section describes the D/R, program mixing,
and other functions common to all model types.
Before setting the model data, use the Model
Type function of the Linkage menu to select themodel type matched to the aircraft. If a different
model type is selected afterwards, the D/R, program
mixing, and other parameters are reset.
If either a helicopter or glider have been selected
DVWKHPRGHOW\SHWKHQWKHVSHFL¿FIXQFWLRQVLQWKH
0RGHOPHQXFDQEHVHWIRUHDFKÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQ,I
you want to switch the settings for each conditionby switch, stick position, etc., use the Condition

6HOHFWIXQFWLRQWRDGGÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV 8SWR¿YH
conditions can be used)
Note: The FX-22 is designed so that the airplaneand glider (including EP glider) model types
are compatible with aircraft of similar typewings.
This section outlines the relationship between
the functions common to airplanes andgliders, except some dedicated functions,and model type.
The setting menus will depend on the numberof servos and other differences according to
the wing type used. The setup screens in the
instruction manual are typical examples.

ŏ Access the model menu shown below by
touching the MDL button twice at the home
screen, etc.
<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor

ŏ Select the function
name and return to
the Model menu by
touching the RTN buttonor pushing the HOME/
EXIT button.

ŏ To next page
RETURNŏ Select the function you want to set andaccess the setup screen by touching the RTN
button.

**The Model menu screen depends on themodel type.

Model Menu functions (Common) listƔ6(5926HUYR WHVW DQG VHUYR SRVLWLRQ GLVSOD\ )RU D
description of its functions, see the Linkage Menu
section.)Ɣ&21',7,21 DSSOLFDEOHWRKHOLFRSWHUDQG
JOLGHUVHOHFWLRQV

information on how to do so, please refer to the
Switch Setting Method located at the back of thismanual.
Ɣ352*0,;
7KH ); WUDQVPLWWHU DOORZV XS WR ILYH
completely customizable program mixes.

)OLJKW FRQGLWLRQV DGGLWLRQ GHOHWLRQ FRS\condition renaming, and condition delay can be set.
Ɣ'8$/5$7(
7KH'5FXUYHRID);WUDQVPLWWHUPD\EHDFWLYDWHG IURP D VZLWFK VWLFN SRVLWLRQ HWF )RU<Model Menu (Common Functions)> 107

CONDITION

Flight condition's switch assignment, copy, priority change andcondition delay can be set. [except airplane type]This function, in the Model menu, can be usedWRVZLWFKWKHVHWWLQJVRIXSWRÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVPlease note this is not applicable to airplane typeselections.
Note: To prevent accidental activation of any
XQXVHGÁLJKWFRQGLWLRQVGXULQJÁLJKWVHWWKH
switch setting of those unused conditions tonull [--].
ŏ A Condition Delay function can be set.
Unnecessary fuselage motion which may begenerated when there are sudden changes

in the servo positions and when there arevariations in the operating time between
channels during condition switching. The
delay can be set for each channel to ensure
maximum performance from your aircraft.
When setting the delay function for a speciÀc
Áight condition, the related function changes
after a delay corresponding to the set
amount.
ŏ If multiple conditions were set, theiroperational priority may be customized as
desired.

ŏ Select [CONDITION] at the Model menu andaccess the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.

&XUUHQWO\VHOHFWHGFRQGLWLRQQDPH<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURN &RQGLWLRQQDPH

 &RQGLWLRQVZLWFK&RQGLWLRQVZLWFKVHOHFWLRQGHOHWLRQ
1. Move the cursor to the switch item of thecondition you want to select/delete andaccess the switch setup screen by touching
the RTN button and select the switch and ON
direction.
)RUDGHWDLOHGGHVFULSWLRQRIWKHVHWWLQJPHWKRGVHH>6ZLWFK
Setting Method] at the back of this manual.

Select the copy destination condition byscrolling the touch sensor. Then, touch the
RTN button.
*The current condition can not be selected for the copy
destination condition.

3. Move the cursor to the [COPY] item andtouch the RTN button. A confirmation
message appears.
*The display blinks.

4. Touch the RTN button for one second andthe copying is completed. (Touch the S1
button to stop copying.)&RQGLWLRQFRS\&RQGLWLRQQDPH
6HWXSVFUHHQSDJH

1. Move the cursor to the [SOURCE] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the copy source condition by scrolling
the touch sensor. Then, touch the RTN button.
2. Move the cursor to the [DESTIN.] item andtouch the RTN button.

108 <Model Menu (Common Functions)>

1. Move the cursor to the condition which you
want to change.
2. The RTN button is pushed and it goes to aname input screen.
)RUDGHWDLOHGGHVFULSWLRQRIWKHVHWWLQJPHWKRGVHH>8VHU
name registration Method] at this manual.
*A name of up to 8 characters can be entered as the condition
name. Please note that a space is also counted as one
character.

3ULRULW\FKDQJH
1. Move the cursor to the priority up-arrow or
down-arrow you want to change and touch
the RTN button.
The priority of the corresponding condition ischanged. (The last condition becomes thehighest priority.)*The Normal condition cannot be changed or moved, itspriority is always the lowest.

&RQGLWLRQGHOD\VHWWLQJ

6HWXSVFUHHQSDJH

1. Select the condition which you want to set.
2. Move the cursor to the "DELAY" icon of thechannel you want to set and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the delay amount by scrolling thetouch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)
3. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment andreturn to the cursor mode.

<Model Menu (Common Functions)> 109

'8$/5$7(

The angle and curve of each stick function can be set. [All model types]

Dual rate function is used to adjust the amountof throw and the operational curve of the stick
IXQFWLRQV DLOHURQ HOHYDWRU DQG UXGGHU  IRU HDFKÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQRUXSWRUDWHVIRUHDFKIXQFWLRQ
)RUDLUSODQHW\SHLWLVDOVRSRVVLEOHWRDGMXVWWKH
operational curve of the throttle function.
This is normally used after the End Point
programming has been completed to define themaximum throw. When mixing is applied from one
channel to another channel, both channels can be
adjusted at the same time by adjusting the operation

rate through the dual rate function.
Neutral position of the dual rate curve can be
set.
'XDOUDWHFXUYHRI)/$3)/$3%877(5)/<
DQG &$0%(5 IXQFWLRQ FDQ EH VHW $LUSODQHGlider))/$3DQG%877(5)/<DUHJOLGHURQO\IXQFWLRQV
( ; 3 U D W H  V H W W L Q J  L V  Q R W  D O O R Z H G  L Q  W K H  ) / $ 3)/$3%877(5)/<DQG&$0%(5IXQFWLRQV,QGLYLGXDOVZLWFKVHWWLQJLVQRWDOORZHGLQWKH)/$3)/$3
DQG %877(5)/< &$0%(5 IXQFWLRQV &RQGLWLRQ
switching only)ŏ Select [DUAL RATE] at the Model menu and accessthe setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
ŏLeft/right (up/down) rate
[Airplane]ŏOperation curve (left/right, up/down)ŏFunction selection<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏNeutral position&XUUHQWO\VHOHFWHGFLUFXLWŏSwitch selection
8SWR¿YHUDWHVIRUHDFKIXQFWLRQ[Helicopter/glider]ŏCondition selectionŏSwitch selection

110 <Model Menu (Common Functions)>ŏCondition ModeselectionŏSwitch mode
selection

'XDOUDWHVHWWLQJSURFHGXUH
1. Function selection
Move the cursor to the function selection
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
Select the function you want to adjust byscrolling the touch sensor.
Touch the RTN button to the cursor mode.
2. Switch selection
Move the cursor to the circuit # item andaccess the switch setup screen by touching
the RTN button. Select the switch activation
method and the activation position (ifapplicable).

5. Neutral position adjustment
3HUIRUPWKHVHWWLQJVEHORZDIWHUFKDQJLQJWRWKHFLUFXLWRU
condition you want to adjust.

Move the cursor to the [NT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the neutral
position is reset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to the cursor mode.

)RUDGHWDLOHGGHVFULSWLRQRIWKHVHWWLQJPHWKRGVHH>6ZLWFK
Setting Method] at the back of this manual.

3. Left/right (up/down) rate adjustment
3HUIRUPWKHVHWWLQJVEHORZDIWHUFKDQJLQJWRWKHFLUFXLWRU
condition you want to adjust.

Move the cursor to the rate item you want toadjust and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 100
Adjustment range: 0~140
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
Repeat this procedure for additional rate
and other functions as desired.
4. Operation curve (EXP curve) adjustment
3HUIRUPWKHVHWWLQJVEHORZDIWHUFKDQJLQJWRWKHFLUFXLWRU
condition you want to adjust.

Move the cursor to the EXP item you want toadjust and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.)
8VLQJWKH(;3FXUYHLVHIIHFWLYHWRVPRRWKHRUVRIWHQWKH
FRQWUROLQSXWVDURXQGFHQWHUWRDYRLGRYHUFRQWUROOLQJWKH
model. This is often used for the ailerons, elevator andrudder and may be used with the throttle in the case of an
airplane selection to smoothe the engine controls as well.

Touch the RTN button to end adjustment andreturn to the cursor mode.
Repeat this procedure for all other rates andfunctions as desired.

<Model Menu (Common Functions)> 111

352*0,;

Program mixing which can be freely customized. Up to five mixings
can be used for each model. [All model types]

Programmable mixing may be used to correctundesired tendencies of the aircraft, and it may also be
XVHGIRUXQXVXDOFRQWUROFRQ¿JXUDWLRQV0L[LQJPHDQV
that the motion of a command channel, called the"master," is added to the motion of the mixed channel,
called "slave."<RXPD\FKRRVHWRKDYHWKH0DVWHU VWULPDGGHGWR
WKH6ODYHFKDQQHOUHVSRQVH 7ULPVHWWLQJ 7KHPL[LQJ

FXUYH /LQHDUSRLQW FDQEHFKDQJHG<RXPD\VHOHFW0L[LQJ212))VZLWFKFRQWURORU\RXPD\FKRRVHWR
have mixing remaining on all the time.
The Programmable mixing includes a powerful linkfunction, which allows Programmable mixing to belinked with the special mixing functions, or with otherprogrammable mixing functions. The link function canbe set up for Master and Slave channel individually.

ŏ Select [PROG. MIX] at the Model menu and accessthe setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏMix #

0L[VHWXSVFUHHQFDOO
ŏ Move the cursor to the mix # whose function you want to activate
and access the setup screen by touching the RTN button.
ŏMixing rate (Left/right, up/down)[Linear curve]ŏCurve selectionŏCurrent mix No.

ŏOffset rate(X, Y)[5-point curve]ŏCurve selectionŏPoint rate (point1-5)

ŏSwitch selection

3URJPL[VHWWLQJSURFHGXUHŏON/OFF

Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to activate thefunction and return to the cursor mode.
ŏSlave CHŏMaster CHŏLinki settingiŏTrim mode setting

112 <Model Menu (Common Functions)>

7KHIXQFWLRQLVDFWLYDWHG 21RU2))GLVSOD\
212))VZLWFKDQGPL[UDWHDUHQRWVHWHYHQWKRXJKWKH
function is activated.

Ɣ212))VZLWFKVHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the switch item andaccess the switch setup screen by touching
the RTN button and select the switch and ON
direction.
)RUDGHWDLOHGGHVFULSWLRQRIWKHVHWWLQJPHWKRGVHH>6ZLWFK
Setting Method] at the back of this manual.
$OZD\VRQZKHQ>@Ɣ0DVWHUFKDQQHOVHWWLQJ
1. Move the cursor to the [MASTER] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the function by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to change the function
and return to the cursor mode.
2. When you want to link this mixing with othermixes, move the cursor to the [LINK] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the link mode, either [] or [-], byscrolling the touch sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to set the link modeand return to the cursor mode.
*Check to ensure that the link mode is functioning properly
by operating the mix accordingly.
*Master channel control can be set to activate based on theamount of stick input, or VR input, neither of which include
ATV, D/R, and mixing selection. In this case, the switch
setup screen is displayed by touching the RTN button with
"H/W" selected in the function selection. Select master
FKDQQHOFRQWURO 7RWHUPLQDWHWKH+:VHOHFWLRQVHOHFW
WKH>@GLVSOD\DQGWRXFKWKH571EXWWRQƔ6ODYHFKDQQHOVHWWLQJ
1. Move the cursor to the [SLAVE] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the function by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to change the function
and return to the cursor mode.
2. When you want to link this mixing with othermixes, move the cursor to the [LINK] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the link mode to [] or [-] by scrolling
the touch sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to set the link modeand return to the cursor mode.
*Check the direction by actual operation.

Ɣ7ULPPRGH212))VHWWLQJ
1. When changing the trim mode, move thecursor to the [TRIM] item and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select ON/OFF by scrolling the touch sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to change the trim
mode ON/OFF and return to the cursor
mode.
7RLQFRUSRUDWHWKHPL[LQJIURPWKHPDVWHUWULPVHOHFW>21@
,IWULPLVQRWGHVLUHGVHOHFW>2))@*Effective when a function is set in the master channel.

Ɣ/LQHDUFXUYHVHWWLQJ[Rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the mixing rate setting
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.

Touch the RTN button to end adjustment andreturn to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for all other rates as
desired.
[Offsetting the curve horizontally in the verticalor horizontal direction]
1. Move the cursor to the [OFFS] setting item
and touch the RTN button to switch to thedata input mode.
Adjust the offset rate by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for the other direction.

ƔSRLQWFXUYHVHWWLQJ[Rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the point rate setting item
you want to adjust and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point as
desired.

<Model Menu (Common Functions)> 113)8(/0,;

Dedicated mixing used to adjust the fuel mixture of applicableengines. [Airplane/helicopter]

Note: Initial settings does not assign fuel mix toany channel. Prior to utilizing the Fuel Mix
settings, select an unused channel on yourreceiver and assign it accordingly for the
mixture control. Additionally, please make
ŏ Select [FUEL MIX] at the Model menu andsure that your [Control] and [Trim] are set toaccess the setup screen shown below bynull [--].
touching the RTN button.
[Airplane type]

7KLVIXQFWLRQLVXWLOL]HGWRUH¿QHLQÀLJKWQHHGOH
adjustments of engines that offer mixture control
carburetors.

<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏNeedle high trim
selectionŏAcceleration
Acceleration setting[Helicopter type]ŏMixing curve copy function
Move the COPY item and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the copy destination condition byscrolling the touch sensor and touch the
RTN button. Select the [YES] and touch
the RTN button.

ŏEngine cut setting

114 <Model Menu (Common Functions)>

6HWWLQJPHWKRG%HIRUHXVLQJWKLVIXQFWLRQDVVLJQWKH>)8(/0,;@IXQFWLRQWRDQXQXVHGFKDQQHOLQWKH/LQNDJHPHQX>)81&7,21@Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
1. Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to activate thefunction and return to the cursor mode. (ONis displayed.)
2. Move the cursor to the [MIX] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the mixing mode you want to change
by scrolling the touch sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to change the modeand return to the cursor mode.
:KHQ>0,;@LVVHOHFWHGDWWKH>0,;@LFRQWKHWKURWWOHFXUYHGDWDWKDWLVVHWEHFRPHVWKHPL[PDVWHU:KHQ>810,;@LV
selected, the throttle stick position becomes the master.

ƔSRLQWFXUYHVHWWLQJ
1. Move the cursor to the point rate setting item
you want to adjust and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end adjustment andreturn to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point.

Ɣ1HHGOHKLJKWULPVHWWLQJ
1. Move the cursor to the needle high trim
selection item and access the switch setup
screen by touching the RTN button. Selectthe needle high trim lever.
)RUDGHWDLOHGGHVFULSWLRQRIWKHVHWWLQJPHWKRGVHH>6ZLWFK
Setting Method] at the back of this manual.

2. Move the cursor to the TRIM rate item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Adjust the trim rate by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -30~30
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end adjustment andreturn to the cursor mode.
*Needle high trim works as high trim based on the center.
:RUNVOLNH$7/WULP

Ɣ$FFHOHUDWLRQVHWWLQJ $LUSODQH*This function is used to adjust the needle/engine risecharacteristics during acceleration. This enables anacceleration function which temporarily increases the needle
operation from the throttle stick.
This function is used when there are symptoms of the
mixture being too lean or too rich, which would be
generated by sudden throttle stick inputs.

[Acceleration rate setting (RATE)]*Acceleration can be adjusted for both high and low settings.

[Damping rate setting (DUMPING)]
7KHUHWXUQWLPHDIWHURSHUDWLRQ 'XPSLQJ FDQEHVHW

Move the cursor to the rate item you want tochange and touch the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end adjustment andreturn to the cursor mode.
[Operation point setting (ACT POS)]*The operation point at which the acceleration setting will
occur. If this point is exceeded, acceleration is performed.

Move the cursor to the [ACT POS] item andhold the throttle stick to the position you
want to change and touch the RTN button
for one second.
Note: When using the acceleration function,
since the needle stroke is large, adjust yoursettings so there is no binding of your linkage.

Ɣ(QJLQHFXWVHWWLQJ* Operation linked with the throttle hold function, throttle cut
function, and idle down function is possible. The throttle cut
position can be adjusted accordingly. Set it to the full closed
position.

Move the cursor to the throttle cut or idle
down item and touch the RTN button toswitch to the data input mode.
Adjust the servo position by scrolling thetouch sensor.
Initial value: THR CUT: 17, IDLE DOWN: 0
Adjustment range: THR CUT: 0~50, IDLEDOWN: 0~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

<Model Menu (Common Functions)> 115

MODEL MENU (AIRPLANE/GLIDER FUNCTIONS)
The dedicated mixes, etc. that are applicablewhen an airplane or glider model type is selected
are displayed in this Model menu functions
section. Prior to adjusting any of these mixes, etc.
use the Model Type function in the Linkage menu
to select the model type, wing type, and tail typematched to the aircraft. Other settings reset thedata used in mixing function, etc.
For glider, many dedicated mixes can be set
for each flight condition, as required. To switch
the settings for each condition by switch or stick

position, use the Condition Select function to add
flight conditions. (Up to five conditions can beused)
Note: The FX-22 is designed so that the airplane andglider model types can utilize aircraft of the samewing type.
The functions common to airplanes and gliders, withthe exception of some dedicated functions, arewritten without regard to the model type.
While there may be differences, depending on thenumber of servos, etc. the wing type used, etc. thesetup screens in the instruction manual are typicalexamples.

ŏ Access the model menu shown below by
touching the MDL button twice at the home
screen, etc.

*The Model menu screen depends onthe model type.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

RETURN

Scrollingŏ Moving
cursorŏ To next page

ŏ Select the function
you want to set andaccess the setup
screen by touching
the RTN button.

Model Menu functions list
PITCH CURVE
Compatible with VPP (Variable Pitch Propeller)
function. [Airplane, general]
THR CURVE
THR curve function adjusts the throttle operation
curve for optimum engine speed to throttle stick
movement. [Airplane/glider, general]
THR DELAY
THR-DELAY function is used to slow the
response of the throttle stick to simulate the slow
response of a turbine engine, etc. [Airplane,
general]AIL DIFFERENTIAL
The left and right aileron differential can be
adjusted independently. For glider, the differential

116 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

UDWHLQEXWWHUÀ\PL[LQJFDQEHDGMXVWHG
[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]
FLAP SETTING
7KHXSGRZQWUDYHORIHDFKÀDSFDQEHDGMXVWHG
independently for each servo according to the wing
W\SH>$LUSODQHJOLGHUÀDSVRUPRUH@
AIL to CAMB.FLP
7KLVPL[RSHUDWHVWKHFDPEHUÀDSVLQWKHDLOHURQ
mode. It improves the roll axis characteristics.
>$LUSODQHJOLGHUDLOHURQVÀDSVRUPRUH@
AIL to BRKFLP
7KLVPL[RSHUDWHVWKHEUDNHÀDSVLQWKHDLOHURQ
mode. It improves the roll axis characteristics.
>*OLGHUÀDSV@

AIL to RUDThis mix is used when you want to coordinate
the rudder with aileron operation for banking atshallow angles. [Airplane/glider, general]
RUD to AILThis function is used when you want to mix
the ailerons with rudder input. Rudder is applied
GXULQJUROOLQJPDQHXYHUVVXFKDVNQLIHHGJHÀLJKW[Airplane/glider, general]
CAMBER MIXThis mix adjusts the camber and corrects theelevators. [Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]
ELE to CAMBERThis mix is used when you want to the mix
FDPEHUÀDSVZLWKHOHYDWRUWRLQFUHDVHWKHOLIWRIWKH
model. [Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]
CAMB.FLP to ELEThis mix is used to correct for changes in attitude
when the camber flaps are utilized. [Airplane/
JOLGHUDLOHURQVÀDSRUPRUH@
BUTTERFLY (Crow)
This function is used to quickly slow the aircraft
and/or reduce the altitude. [Glider, 2 ailerons or
PRUH )O\LQJDLOHURQVÀDSRUPRUH @TRIM MIX
7KHDLOHURQVHOHYDWRUVDQGÀDSVWULPRIIVHWUDWH
can be accessed by selecting a switch or condition
selection as desired. [Glider, 2 ailerons or more]
AIRBRAKE

RUDDER 1
Winglet(at Flying wing)

AIL1(Main Aileron)

AIL 3(Chip Aileron)

FLP 3(Brake Flap)

FLP 1(Camber Flap)

V-TAILELEVATOR(RUDDER 2)

This function is used when airbrakes arenecessary when landing or when diving, etc. duringÀLJKW $LUSODQHDLOHURQVRUPRUH
GYRO
This is a dedicated mix when a GYA Series gyrois used. [Airplane/glider, general]
V-TAIL
This function incorporates the elevators andrudder input for use with V-tail models. [Airplane/
JOLGHU9WDLOVSHFL¿FDWLRQV@AILEVATOR (DUAL ELEVATOR)
This function adjusts the elevators and aileronsof models with elevator specifications. [Airplane/
JOLGHUDLOHYDWRUVSHFL¿FDWLRQV@WINGLETThis function adjusts the left and right ruddersof winglet models. [Airplane/glider, winglet
VSHFL¿FDWLRQV@
MOTORThis function adjusts the operation speed whenthe motor of an F5B or other such EP glider isstarted by a switch. [Airplane/glider, general]
RUD to ELEThis function is used to correct rolling maneuvers
VXFKDVNQLIHHGJHÀLJKW>$LUSODQHJHQHUDO@
SNAP ROLLThis function selects the snap roll switch andadjusts the amount of servo input. Servo speed canalso be adjusted. [Airplane general]

FLP 4(Brake Flap)

AIL 2(Main Aileron)

FLP 2(Camber Flap)

RUDDER 2
Winglet(at Flying wing)

AIL 4(Chip Aileron)

AILVATORRUDDER(ELEVATOR 2)

ELEVATOR(AILERON 5)

ELEVATOR 2(AILERON 6)<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 117

PIT CURVE[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general

This function adjusts the pitch curve for VPP(Variable Pitch Propeller) airplane.
*Up to 3 conditions can be set.
7KHSULRULW\LQFUHDVHVLQFRQGLWLRQĺĺRUGHUŏ Select [PIT CURVE] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.

NOTE: When VPP is not assigned to any
channel, the pitch curve is not displayed in
the model menu. In this case, assign VPP toany channel on the function screen.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏCurve rateŏCurve point

Setting method
Ɣ933FRQGLWLRQVHOHFWLRQ
1. Move the cursor to the # button at the top
right side of the screen and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the VPP condition by scrolling thetouch sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to call the setting
screen and return to the cursor mode.
2. Move the cursor to the switch item andtouch the RTN button to access the selection
screen. Select the switch and set its ON
direction.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

Set the VPP condition 2 and 3 switch.
*The VPP conditions can also be checked in the HOME
screen.

button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: 0~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point.
[Moving curve point]
1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to adjust and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the curve point by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: P1: (0), P2: 25, P3: 50, P4:75, P5: (100)
Adjustment range: Up to 2.5 in front of theadjoining point*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the curve
position is reset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point.

ƔSRLQWFXUYHVHWWLQJ[Curve rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting
item you want to adjust and touch the RTN

118 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>[Deleting/returning curve point]Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to delete/return and touch
the RTN button for one second.

THR CURVE[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, general

This function adjusts the throttle curve for
optimum engine speed from throttle stick input.
*When throttle curve is set to ON when there is no throttle
function; this curve acts as the motor function.

ŏ Select [THR CURVE] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.

NOTE: If this throttle curve function is activated,
you can not use the THR-EXP function within
the DUAL RATE function simultaneously.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏCurve rateŏCurve point

Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
1. Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the ON mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to activate thefunction and return to the cursor mode.

ƔSRLQWFXUYHVHWWLQJ[Curve rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting
item you want to adjust and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: 0~100

item you want to adjust and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the curve point by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: P1: (0), P2: 25, P3: 50, P4:75, P5: (100)
Adjustment range: Up to 2.5 in front of theadjoining point*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the curve
position is reset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point.
[Deleting/returning curve point]Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to delete/return and touch
the RTN button for one second.

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point.
[Moving curve point]
1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 119

THR DELAY[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general

THR-DELAY function is used to slow the
response of the throttle stick to simulate the slow
response of a turbine engine, etc.
*This function is the same as THR of servo speed. If it sets up
in great numbers, it overlaps and a THR servo becomes latefurther. Please do not let me overlap. Use either.

ŏ Select [THR DELAY] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

RETURN

Setting method
Ɣ2SHUDWLRQVSHHG GHOD\ VHWWLQJ
1. Move the cursor to the [DELAY] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Adjust the delay rate by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to activate thefunction and return to the cursor mode.

120 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

ŏ To next page[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more

AIL DIFF.

The left and right aileron differential can be
adjusted independently.
)RUJOLGHUWKHGLIIHUHQWLDOUDWHLQEXWWHUÀ\PL[LQJ
can be adjusted.

ŏ Select [AIL DIFF.] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.
[Airplane (2A2F)]

AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)

AIL 2(Main Aileron)
AIL 4(Chip Aileron)*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the Model Type.
<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏ Aileron left/rightadjustment[Glider (4A2F)](Currently selected condition name)

Setting method
Ɣ$LOHURQOHIWULJKWDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the aileron (AIL) 1~4 left (orright) setting item and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the aileron angles by scrolling thetouch sensor when the stick is moved to theleft (or right) end.
Initial value: 100
Adjustment range: 0~120

Ɣ$LOHURQGLIIHUHQWLDODGMXVWPHQWLQEXWWHUÀ\mixingMove the cursor to the [BUTTERFLY AD-UST]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
Adjust the differential rate by scrolling thetouch sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -120~120

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 121

FLAP SET.

[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 Áaps or more

7KHXSGRZQWUDYHORIHDFKÀDS FDPEHUÀDSV
FLP1/2, brake flaps: FLP3/4) can be adjusted
independently for each servo according to thewing type.
ŏ The operation reference point of each Áap can beoffsetFLP 3(Brake Flap)
FLP 1(Camber Flap)

The camber flaps of a 4-flap model canbe mixed with the brake flaps. (BRKFLP to
CMBFLP)

FLP 4(Brake Flap)
FLP 2(Camber Flap)

ŏ An ON/OFF switch can be set.
ŏ Select [FLAP SET.] at the Model menu and access the setup
screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏUp /Down
adjustmentŏOperation reference
point offset(Glider: Currently selected condition name)

Setting method

Adjustment range: -100~100Ɣ)ODSXSGRZQDGMXVWPHQW*When the RTN button is touched for one second, thereference point is reset to the initial value.)

Move the cursor to the flap (FLP) 1~4 Up or
Down item according to the wing type andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode. Adjust the travel independently
by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 100
Adjustment range: -120~120
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

Ɣ5HIHUHQFHSRLQWDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the [OFFSET] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode. Adjust the operation reference
point of each flap by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0

122 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKH%UDNH)/3WR&DPEHU)/3PL[LQJ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling thetouch sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to activate thefunction and return to the cursor mode. (ONis displayed.)
To select a switch, move the cursor to the[SW] item and touch the RTN button to callthe selection screen. Select the switch andset its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

AIL to CMBFLP[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons  2 flaps or
moreThis mix operates the camber flaps (FLP1/2)
in the aileron mode. When the aileron stickis manipulated, the ailerons and camber flaps
perform aileron operation simultaneously to
VLJQL¿FDQWO\LPSURYHWKHUROOD[LVŏ The aileron left/right mixing rate of each Áap servo
can be independently adjusted.
ŏ An ON/OFF switch can be set.
ŏ Linking is possible: Link this mix to other mixes.

FLP 1(Camber Flap)
AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)

FLP 2(Camber Flap)
AIL 2(Main Aileron)
AIL 4(Chip Aileron)*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.

ŏ Select [AIL to CMBFLP] at the Modelmenu and access the setup screen
shown below by touching the RTN
button.

(Glider: Currently selected condition name)<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏ Adjustment of eachÁap servo

Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling thetouch sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to activate thefunction and return to the cursor mode. (ONis displayed.)
When selecting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and touch the RTN button tocall the selection screen. Select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

independently by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -120~120
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

Ɣ/LQNPRGHVHWWLQJ
When linking a mix, move the cursor to the[LINK] item and touch the RTN button toswitch to the data input mode. Select the
ON mode by scrolling the touch sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to set the link modeand return to the cursor mode.

Ɣ0L[LQJUDWHDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the flap (FLP) 1~2 leftor right item according to the wing type
and touch the RTN button to switch to thedata input mode. Adjust the mixing rate

<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 123

AIL to BRAKEFLP
This mix operates the brake flaps (FLP3/4)
in the aileron mode. When the aileron stick is
PDQLSXODWHGWKHDLOHURQDQGEUDNHÀDSVSHUIRUP
the aileron operation simultaneously and the rollaxis is improved.
ŏ The aileron left and right mixing rates can be
adjusted separately for each Áap servo.
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ Linking can be set: Link this mix to other mixes.

[Corresponding model type]: Glider, 4 ÁapsFLP 3
(Brake Flap)

FLP 4(Brake Flap)

AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)

AIL 2(Main Aileron)
AIL 4(Chip Aileron)*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.

ŏ Select [AIL to BRKFLP] at the Modelmenu and access the setup screen
shown below by touching the RTN
button.

(Currently selected condition name)<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏ Adjustment of eachÁap servo

Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling thetouch sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to activate thefunction and return to the cursor mode. (ONis displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and touch the RTN button
to access the selection screen. Select theswitch and set its ON direction. (Always ON
at "--" setting)*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

Ɣ0L[LQJUDWHDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the flap (FLP) 3~4 left or
right item and touch the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode. Adjust the mixing
rate independently by scrolling the touch

124 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -120~120
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

Ɣ/LQNPRGHVHWWLQJ
To activate the mixing, move the cursor to
the [LINK] item and touch the RTN button toswitch to the data input mode. Select the
ON mode by scrolling the touch sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to set the link modeand return to the cursor mode.

AIL to RUD[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, general

Use this mix when you want to mix the rudders
with aileron operation. This allows the aircraft tobank at a steep angle.
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF by aswitch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ The mixing rate can be adjusted.

AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 1
Wingletat Flying wing

(

)

AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 2
Wingletat Flying wing()

V-TAILŏ Select [AIL to RUD] at theModel menu and access the
setup screen shown below by
touching the RTN button.

RUDDER 2
RUDDERRUDDER(Glider: Currently selected condition name)<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

ŏ To next page

RETURN*The display screen is an example.
The actual screen depends on themodel type.

Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling thetouch sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to activate thefunction and return to the cursor mode. (ONis displayed.)
When selecting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and touch the RTN button tocall the selection screen. Select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)

Ɣ0L[LQJUDWHDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the left or right item
and touch the RTN button to switch to thedata input mode. Adjust the mixing rate
independently by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 125

RUD to AIL[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, general

This function is used when you want to mix
the ailerons with rudder input. It is used whenrudder is applied during roll maneuvers suchas, knife edge flight. It can be used to turn orbank scale models, large models, etc. like a fullsize aircraft.
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ Linking can be set: Link this mix to other mixes.
ŏ The mixing rate can also be adjusted.
ŏ A 5-point curve can be set at airplane model type.

(

AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 1
Wingletat Flying wing

)

AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 2
Wingletat Flying wing()

V-TAILRUDDER 2
RUDDERRUDDERŏ Select [RUD to AIL] at the Modelmenu and access the setup screen
shown below by touching the RTN (Glider: Currently selected condition name)button.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

ŏ To next page

RETURN*The display screen is an example.
The actual screen depends on themodel type.

Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling thetouch sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to activate thefunction and return to the cursor mode. (ONis displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and touch the RTN button tocall the selection screen. Select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

Ɣ0L[LQJUDWHDGMXVWPHQW JOLGHU
Move the cursor to the left or right item
and touch the RTN button to switch to thedata input mode. Adjust the mixing rate
independently by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

Ɣ/LQNPRGHVHWWLQJ
To activate the link mixing, move the cursor
to the [LINK] item and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Select the
ON mode by scrolling the touch sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to set the link modeand return to the cursor mode.

126 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>ƔSRLQWFXUYHVHWWLQJ DLUSODQH[Curve rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting
item (left side) you want to adjust and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point.
[Moving curve point]
1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to adjust and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the curve point by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Adjustment range: Up to 2.5 in front of theadjoining point*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the curve
position is reset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point.
[Deleting/returning curve point]Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to delete/return and touch
the RTN button for one second.

<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 127

CAMBER MIX[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more

This function adjusts the rate of camber
operation for the wing camber (ailerons, camber
flaps, brake flaps) in the negative and positive
directions. The aileron, flap, and elevator rates
can also be adjusted independently and attitudechanges caused by camber operation can becorrected.
ŏ Select [CAMBER MIX] at the Modelmenu and access the setup screen
shown below by touching the RTN
button.

*Initial setting assigns camber operation to side lever LS.
ŏ The up/down rates of the aileron, flap, andelevator servos can be adjusted. When the mixing
direction is reversed by the linkage, adjustments
can be made by changing the mixing rate
polarity ( or -).
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ A condition delay can be set. A cut switch which
can turn OFF the delay function can be set.
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏCondition delay
setting

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏCondition delay
cut switch(Glider: Currently selectedcondition name)ŏAileron rateadjustmentŏFlap rateadjustmentŏElevator rateadjustment

128 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling thetouch sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to activate thefunction and return to the cursor mode. (ONis displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and touch the RTN button tocall the selection screen. Select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

Ɣ&RQGLWLRQGHOD\VHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the [COND.DELAY] item
and touch the RTN button to switch to thedata input mode. Adjust the condition delayby scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27

When setting a cut switch, move the cursor
to the [CUT-SW] item and touch the RTN
button to access the selection screen. Selectthe switch and set its ON direction. (Always
ON at "--" setting)*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

Ɣ5DWHDGMXVWPHQW
The rates are adjusted by accessing theaileron, Áap, and elevator rate screens.
Move the cursor to the rate1 or rate2
item and touch the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode. Adjust the rate
independently by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

FLP 4
FLP 3
(Brake Flap) (Brake Flap)
FLP 1
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)(Camber Flap)
AIL1
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)(Main Aileron)
AIL 3
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)(Chip Aileron)
V-TAILELEVATORELEVATOR 2AILVATORELEVATORELEVATOR 2<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 129

ELE to CAMBER[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more

This function is used when you want to mix the
FDPEHUÀDSVZLWKHOHYDWRURSHUDWLRQ:KHQXVHG
the flaps are lowered by up elevator, and lift isincreased.
ŏ Select [ELE to CAMBER] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown below
by touching the RTN button.

ŏ In-Áight mixing can be turned ON/OFF by assigning
this to a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ The mixing rate can be adjusted.
ŏ The point that has little effect near the neutral
position of the elevator stick can be adjusted.
(Glider only)

1RWH7KHHOHYDWRURQWKHWDLOOHVVZLQJZLOODOVR
EHHIIHFWHGZKHQWKLVPL[LVDFWLYDWHG
(Glider: Currently selected condition name)<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

ŏ To next page

RETURN*The display screen is an example.
The actual screen depends on themodel type.

Ɣ0L[LQJUDWHDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the up or down mixing
rate item for each servo and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate independently by scrolling
the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling thetouch sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to activate thefunction and return to the cursor mode. (ONis displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and touch the RTN button tocall the selection screen. Select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)

130 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

Ɣ5DQJHVHWWLQJ *OLGHURQO\
Move the cursor to the [RANGE] item andhold the elevator stick to the desired position(upper or lower side) and then touch the RTN
button for one second to set the range.
*The mixing does not work near neutral of the elevator stick.

Initial value: 0Adjustment range: 0~100

CMBFLP to ELE[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider,
2 ailerons  1 Áap or more

When the camber/speed flaps are utilized,
the aircraft might experience, a change in pitch.
This mix compensates for such changes by
incorporating elevator input.

FLP 1(Camber Flap)

ŏ The elevator servos up/down rates can be
adjusted separately. If the mixing direction isreversed, change the mixing rate polarity ( or ²).
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)

AILVATOR

V-TAILELEVATOR

FLP 2(Camber Flap)

ELEVATOR 2

ELEVATORELEVATOR 2

ŏ Select [CMBFLP to ELE] at the Model menu andaccess the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.
(Glider: Currently selected condition name)<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏElevator rateadjustment

Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling thetouch sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to activate thefunction and return to the cursor mode. (ONis displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and touch the RTN button tocall the selection screen. Select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value*The display screen is an
example. The actual screen
depends on the model type.

Ɣ0L[LQJUDWHDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the RATE1 or RATE2 item
and touch the RTN button to switch to thedata input mode. Adjust the mixing rate
independently by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -120~120
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 131

BUTTERFLY[Corresponding model type]: Glider, Normal: 2 ailerons or more
Flying: 2 ailerons  1 Áap or more

This function is utilized to quickly slow theaircraft and reduce altitude by simultaneously
raising the left and right ailerons and lowering theÀDSV FDPEHUÀDSEUDNHÀDS 
Butterfly (Crow) produces an extremely
HI¿FLHQWODQGLQJFRQ¿JXUDWLRQE\DFFRPSOLVKLQJthe following:
1. Slow the aircraft·s velocity.
2. Provide washout at the wing tips to reduce
the tendency to tip stall.

ŏ Select [BUTTERFLY] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.

3. Create more lift toward the center of thewing allowing it to Áy at a slower speedŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ The point at which the butterfly operationreference point can be offset.
ŏ The operational speed of the ailerons and flaps
can be adjusted.
ŏ The differential rate can be adjusted.
*For a description of the setting method, see the ailerondifferential function.

*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.
(Currently selected condition name)<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏAileron/Áap rateadjustmentŏElevator adjustment

ŏ Servo speed settingŏButterÁy operation reference point

132 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>Ɣ(OHYDWRUFRPSHQVDWLRQFXUYHDGMXVWPHQW

Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling thetouch sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to activate thefunction and return to the cursor mode. (ONis displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and touch the RTN button tocall the selection screen. Select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)

Offset point

Output (Y)Fixed (0)2- Intermediate point
1- End point

Settable
Settable

Position (X)Fixed (offset
position)
Settable
Fixed* The range where mixing does not work close to the neutral
position of the elevator stick can be adjusted. (Glider only)*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

Ɣ5DWHDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the aileron, flap orelevator rate item and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Adjust therate independently by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -200~200 (Elevator:-120~120)*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

*When offset is set, the curve is initialized.

Ɣ5HIHUHQFHSRLQWDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the [OFFSET] item andhold the airbrake stick to the desired position
and then touch the RTN button for one
second to set the butterfly operationalreference point.
Initial value: 15 (upper side)
Adjustment range: 0~100

Ɣ6HUYRVSHHGVHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the aileron, flap orelevator speed item and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

FLP 4
FLP 3
(Brake Flap) (Brake Flap)
FLP 1
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)(Camber Flap)
AIL1
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)(Main Aileron)
AIL 3
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)(Chip Aileron)
V-TAILELEVATORELEVATOR 2

Touch the RTN button to activate thefunction and return to the cursor mode.

AILVATORELEVATORELEVATOR 2<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 133

TRIM MIX

[Corresponding model type]: Glider, 2 ailerons or more

This function adjusts the trim offset rates of the
DLOHURQVHOHYDWRUVDQGÀDSV FDPEHUÀDSVEUDNH
ÀDSV DFFRUGLQJWRWKHÀLJKWVWDWXVAs an example this function can be set up for
ODXQFKLQJZLWKVSHHGÀDSVDQGDLOHURQVGURRSHG
and a slight amount of up elevator, and can be
XVHGIRUKLJKVSHHGÀ\LQJZLWKERWKDLOHURQVDQG
speed flaps reflexed slightly, and a bit of down
elevator.
To prevent sudden trim changes when switchingÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVDGHOD\FDQEHVHWWRSURYLGHD
ŏ Select [TRIM MIX] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.

smooth transition between the two conditions. It
is also possible to program a cut switch which
will turn off the delay.
Furthermore, you can set the auto switch, which
will link the trim mix to a stick, switch, or dial.
Additionally, the speed of the aileron, elevator,
DQGÀDSVHUYRVFDQEHDGMXVWHG

*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.
(Currently selected condition name)<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏ Ailerons, flaps, andelevators offset rateŏSwitchselection
ŏ Ailerons, flaps, andelevators servo speed
settingŏ Condition delay
settingŏAuto switch selection

134 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27

Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.)

Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling thetouch sensor.

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
When setting a cut switch, move the cursor
to the [CUT-SW] item and touch the RTN
button to access the selection screen. Selectthe switch and set its ON direction. (Always
ON at "--" setting)*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to activate thefunction and return to the cursor mode. (ONis displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor to
the switch item and touch the RTN button
to access the selection screen. Select theswitch and set its ON direction. (Always ON
at "--" setting)*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

Ɣ6HUYRVSHHGVHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the aileron, flap orelevator speed item and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

Ɣ7ULPRIIVHWUDWHDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the aileron, flap orelevator rate item and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Adjust therate independently by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -250~250

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to activate thefunction and return to the cursor mode.

Ɣ$XWRVZLWFKVHOHFWLRQ*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

When selecting an auto switch, move thecursor to the [AUTO-SW] item and touch the
RTN button to access the selection screen.
Select the switch and set its ON direction.
(Always ON at "--" setting)Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

Ɣ&RQGLWLRQGHOD\VHWWLQJ*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

Move the cursor to the [COND.DELAY] item
and touch the RTN button to switch to thedata input mode. Adjust the condition delayby scrolling the touch sensor.

FLP 4
FLP 3
(Brake Flap) (Brake Flap)
FLP 1
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)(Camber Flap)
AIL1
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)(Main Aileron)
AIL 3
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)(Chip Aileron)
V-TAILAILVATORELEVATORELEVATOR 2

ELEVATORELEVATOR 2<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 135

AIRBRAKE[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, 2 ailerons or more

This function is used to increase the aircraft's
drag and is useful for landing or diving, etc.
The preset elevators and flaps (camber flap,
brake flap) offset amount can be activated by aswitch.
The offset amount of the aileron, elevator, andflap servos can be adjusted as needed. Also the
VSHHGRIWKHDLOHURQHOHYDWRUDQGÀDSVHUYRVFDQ
be adjusted. If the Auto Mode is activated, thiswill link the Airbrake to a stick, switch, or dial. A
separate stick switch or dial can also be set as the
ON/OFF switch.

6HWWLQJH[DPSOHIRU)$DQGRWKHUÀDSHURQVSHFL¿FDWLRQV(When 2 ailerons model type selected)
Offset rate:
AIL: [-35~-45], AIL2: [-35~-45], ELE: [5~7]
Note: The input numerics are examples. Adjust the travel tomatch the aircraft.
Mode setting:
ACT: [ON]Switch: [SW-C]
AUTO-SW: [--]

ŏ Select [AIRBRAKE] at the Model menu and accessthe setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.

*The display screen is an example. The
actual screen depends on the model type.

<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏ Ailerons, flaps, andelevators offset rateŏSwitchselection
ŏ Ailerons, flaps, andelevators servo speed
settingŏAuto switch selection

136 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>Ɣ6HUYRVSHHGVHWWLQJ

Setting method

Move the cursor to the aileron, flap orelevator speed item and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)

Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling thetouch sensor.
*The display blinks.

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to activate thefunction and return to the cursor mode. (ONis displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor to
the switch item and touch the RTN button
to access the selection screen. Select theswitch and set its ON direction. (Always ON
at "--" setting)Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.

Ɣ$XWRVZLWFKVHOHFWLRQ
When setting a auto switch, move the cursor
to the [AUTO-SW] item and touch the RTN
button to access the selection screen. Selectthe switch and set its ON direction. (Always
ON at "--" setting)*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

Ɣ2IIVHWUDWHDGMXVWPHQW*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

Move the cursor to the aileron, flap orelevator rate item and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Adjust therate independently by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -250~250
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

FLP 4
FLP 3
(Brake Flap) (Brake Flap)
FLP 1
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)(Camber Flap)
AIL1
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)(Main Aileron)
AIL 3
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)(Chip Aileron)
AILVATOR

V-TAILELEVATORELEVATOR 2

ELEVATORELEVATOR 2<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 137

[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, general

GYRO

This function is used when a GYA Series gyrois used to stabilize the aircraft's attitude. The
sensitivity and operation mode (Normal mode/
AVCS mode) can be changed via a switch.
ŏ Three rates (Rate 1/Rate 2/Rate 3) can beswitched.
ŏ Up to 3 axes (Gyro/Gyro 2/Gyro 3) can be
simultaneously controlled.

ŏ Select [GYRO] at the Model menu andaccess the setup screen shown below
by touching the RTN button.
[Rate 1 setup screen]

Note: This setting does not assign a sensitivity
channel. To do so, use the Linkage menu
prior to assigning the sensitivity channel(Gyro/Gyro2/Gyro3), be sure to select anunused channel.
Set the [Control] and [Trim] settings other thanFunction to [--].

(Active rate # display)<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏ Rate1-3 setup
screen selection
ŏ Gyro typeselection

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

ŏ ACT/INH
ŏ Switch selection[Rate 2 setup screen]ŏ The operation mode (AVCS/NOR)
and sensitivity of the three axis
Gyro/Gyro2/Gyro3 can be set.

[Rate 3 setup screen]

Setting method*Prior to using the Function menu in the Linkage menu toassign the sensitivity channel (Gyro/Gyro2/Gyro3) select anunused channel.
Set [Control] and [Trim] other than function to [--].

Ɣ5DWHVHWXSVFUHHQVHOHFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the setup screen selection
item and touch the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode. Select the setup
screen # by scrolling the touch sensor.

138 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

Touch the RTN button to change the setup
screen and return to the cursor mode.

Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [INH] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling thetouch sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to activate thefunction and return to the cursor mode.

When setting a rate selection switch, movethe cursor to the switch item and touch the
RTN button to access the selection screen.
Select the switch and set its ON direction.
(Always ON at "--" setting)*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

Ɣ*\URW\SHVHOHFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the gyro type selection
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode. Select the gyro typeby scrolling the touch sensor.
[GY]: When a Futaba GYA gyro is used
[NORM]: When using something other than
Futaba GYA gyro is used.
Touch the RTN button to change the gyrotype and return to the cursor mode.
*When a Futaba GYA gyro is used and [GY] type is selected,
the sensitivity set value is directly read in both the AVCS
and NORM modes.

Ɣ2SHUDWLRQPRGHVHOHFWLRQ *<$J\URselection item and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Selectthe operation mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
[AVCS]: AVCS mode
[NORM]: Normal mode
Touch the RTN button to change theoperation mode and return to the cursor
mode.

Ɣ6HQVLWLYLW\VHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the sensitivity icon andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Adjust the sensitivity by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: 0~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, thesensitivity is reset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.

Move the cursor to the operation mode([DPSOH 6HWWLQJWKUHHD[LVXVLQJD*<$DQG*<$ ŏ Wing type: Aileron 2 servos mounted fuselage selectedŏ Set 5CH → GYRO (GYA431AIL), 7CH → GYRO2 (GYA431ELE), 8CH → GYRO3 (GYA430RUD), CTRL
and TRIM → [--] : at the Function menu of the Linkage menu.
ŏ GYRO setting of the Model menu.

Rate
#1
#2
#3

GYRO
GYRO ２
GYRO ３
AVCS : 60% AVCS : 60% AVCS : 60%

TYPE
GY

NORM : 60% NORM : 60% NORM : 60%

GY

ACT/INH
OFF/ON
INH
ON/OFF

SW
SE
SE*Set so that Rate 1 is turned on at the back position of switch E and Rate 3 is turned ON at the front position. Since
switch E is turned OFF at the center, Rate 2 remains [INH].
AVCS
GAIN 0％NORMAL

R7008SB

When AVCS is used werecommend that thesensitivity CH be set tothe 3-position.

GYA431

S.BUS/S.BUS2 port

Aileron servo

GYA431:KHQD6%86SRUWLV
XVHG56%&+0RGH
LVVHWWR0RGH%>'@

Elevator servo

GYA430Rudder servo<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 139

V-TAIL[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, V-tailThis function enables adjustments for left andright rudder angle changes during elevator andrudder operation of a V-tail airplane.
V-tail is when two servos are used together tocontrol rudder movement as elevators. In addition
to each elevator side moving up and down together,each side moves in opposite directions when moving
as rudders. On a V-tail, this is also known as a
Ruddervator, as they serve the same purpose.

ELEVATOR(RUDDER 2)

RUDDER(ELEVATOR 2)

ŏ Select [V-TAIL] at the Model menu andaccess the setup screen shown below
by touching the RTN button.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

RETURN(Elevator function)
Up and down travel adjustment ofelevator operation

Setting methodƔ7UDYHODGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the item you want toadjust and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 50Adjustment range: -120~120
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
*If the mixing direction is reversed, adjustments can be madeby changing the mixing rate polarity (+ or -).
*If a large value of travel is specified, when the sticks are
moved at the same time, the controls may bind or run out oftravel. Decrease the travel until no binding occurs.

140 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

ŏ To next page

(Rudder function)
Left and right travel
adjustment of rudder
operation

AILEVATOR[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, Ailevator(Effective only when 2 servos used at the elevators)

This function improves the performance of the rollaxis by operating the elevators as ailerons.
Ailevator is where each elevator in a standard(conventional) or v-tail moves independently, likeailerons on a wing. In addition to each elevator side
moving up and down together, each side moves in
opposite directions when moving as an Ailevator. On
a V-tail, this is also known as a Ruddervator, as they
can serve the same purpose. Typically, both Ailevatorand ailerons are coupled together to maximize roll
performance, especially on larger wingspan planes.

ELEVATOR(AILERON 5)

ELEVATOR 2(AILERON 6)

Note: Select Ailevator as the Model Type at the Model
Type screen. This changes the output channel. Check
the Function menu.

ŏ Select [AILEVATOR] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

RETURN(Elevator function)ŏ The up and down rate of both
elevators when the elevator stick
is moved can be individually
adjusted.

Setting methodƔ7UDYHODGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the item you want toadjust and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: ELE: 100, AIL: 0
Adjustment range: -120~120

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

ŏ To next page

(Aileron function)
ŏ When the elevators are usedas ailerons, aileron travel ofthe left and right elevators
can be adjusted.

*If the mixing direction is reversed, adjustments can be madeby changing the mixing rate polarity (+ or -).
*If a large value of travel is specified, when the sticks are
moved at the same time, the controls may bind or run out oftravel. Decrease the travel until no binding occurs.

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.

<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 141

WINGLET[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, Flying wing onlyThis function adjusts the left and right rudder
angles of airplanes with winglets.
Winglets are used to improve the efficiency ofaircraft by lowering the lift-induced drag caused by
wingtip vortices. The winglet is a vertical or angled
extension located at the tip of each wing.
Winglets work by increasing the effective aspectratio wing without adding greatly to the structuralstress and hence necessary weight of its structure- an extension of wing span would also permit
lowering of induced drag, though it would causeparasitic drag and would require boosting thestrength of the wing and hence its weight. There
would come a point at which no overall usefulgains would be made. A winglet helps to solve thisby effectively increasing the aspect ratio without
adding to the span of the wing.

RUDDER 1
Winglet(at Flying
wing )RUDDER 2
Winglet(at Flying
wing )

ŏ Select [WINGLET] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.

<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

RETURN

Setting methodƔ7UDYHODGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the item you want toadjust and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 100
Adjustment range: -120~120
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
*If the mixing direction is reversed, change the mixing rate
polarity (+ or -).

142 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

ŏ To next page

(Rudder 1/2)
ŏ The travel during rudder stick operation
can be individually adjusted.

MOTOR[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, generaltime operation, set the ACT/INH item to [INH] andthen reset it to [ON].
ŏ The motor channel is controlled by SW-G. (Glider:
Initial setting) When changing the switch or stick
which controls the motor, Àrst change Function of
the Linkage menu.
ŏ If the Model Type selected is Airplane, the MOTOR
function is changed from INH to ON and it is not
assigned to another channel, the changes fromthe throttle channel to the motor channel areenabled.

This function lets you set the speed when the
motor of an F5B or other EP glider is started via
a switch. The operation speed can be set for two
ranges, slow speed flight and high speed flight(Speed 1/Speed 2). This function can also be
operated as a safety function by programming it toa switch.
ŏ The In side and Out side operating speeds canbe adjusted independently in 2 ranges (Speed 1/
Speed 2).
ŏ The boundary between the 2 ranges can be set.
(From Speed 1 to Speed 2)
ŏ The operational speed can only be activated at
the initial operation. However, operation can be
repeated by setting the switch to OFF before theoperation is Ànished. When you want to reset one

ŏ Select [MOTOR] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.

Note: Initial setting does not assign a motor
channel according to the model type. Prior to
DVVLJQLQJWKHPRWRUFKDQQHOÀQGDQXQXVHG
channel. Then, use the Function menu of the
Linkage menu.
Set [Control] to the switch you want to use
and [Trim] to [--].
Note: When using this function, always checkthe initial operation with the propeller
removed.

<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

RETURN

Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
When using this function, move the cursor to
the [ACT/INH] item and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Select the[ACT] by scrolling the touch sensor and touch
the RTN button.
When selecting the ON/OFF switch, move thecursor to the switch item and touch the RTN
button to access the selection screen. Selectthe switch and set its ON direction. (Always
ON at "--" setting)

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

ŏ To next pageThe screen graph display OFF direction alsochanges.
Note:ŏ)LUVWGHFLGHWKHPRWRU2))GLUHFWLRQDQGWKHQ
set the speed. When you want to reset the
motor OFF direction, also reset the speed.
ŏ :H UHFRPPHQG WKDW 0RWRU 2)) EH VHW LQ
combination with F/S.
ŏ 6HW WKH EDVLF RSHUDWLRQ GLUHFWLRQ ZLWK WKH
Reverse function to match the ESC used.
ŏ$OZD\VVHWWKH0RWRU2))SRVLWLRQ

*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

Ɣ0RWRURIISRVLWLRQVHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the [MOTOR OFF] item
and touch the RTN button for one second
when the motor function switch (SG, etc.) isin the motor OFF position you want to set. The
direction of the motor switch is memorized.

<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 143

Ɣ6WDUWVZLWFKIXQFWLRQŏ ON/OFF direction
ŏ Motor function switch
current position

Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHPRWRUVSHHGIXQFWLRQ
When using motor speed function, move thecursor to the [INH] item and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the [ACT] by scrolling the touch sensor
and touch the RTN button.

Ɣ6LIWLQJWKHERXQGDU\EHWZHHQWKHUDQJHVWhen active, the "START SW" allows the
motor's state to change from OFF to ON. The
motor is ON when the main SW and "STARTSW" are turned ON simultaneously. The motorchanges to OFF only when the main SW isturned off. If "START SW" is turned OFF but themain SW is still ON, the motor remains ON.
[START SW function example]
When the throttle (motor) stick is assigned as the "START SW",and the low throttle position of the throttle curve is adjusted, themotor starts operating with the initial stick movement. The motor
will not cease functionality even if the stick position is returned toit's lowest setting.

Ɣ7ULPHIIHFWLQYDOLGVHWWLQJLQPRWRU2))

Move the cursor to the [SPEED 1!2] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Adjust the boundary position by scrolling thetouch sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -100~100

If one of the trim levers is assigned to theMotor function, it is possible to turn the
motor off with the trim lever. To maintaincompatibility after updating the FX-22/S, thetrim setting is adjusted to the on position.
However, it is suggested to return it to the off
position accordingly in the programming of
the transmitter.

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)*Data Reset will return the trim setting to the off position.

Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.

Ɣ2SHUDWLRQVSHHGDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the [IN] (on to off) or [OUT](off to on) item and touch the RTN button toswitch to the data input mode.
Adjust the operation speed you want to set
by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27

Ɣ6FUHHQDWWKHWLPHRIWKHPRWRU2))VHWWLQJ
When the MOTOR OFF setting is highlighted,
you will note the presence of the small cursor
that indicates the MOTOR OFF position. To
adjust this MOTOR OFF position, use thethrottle stick to move the cursor accordingly.
When satisfied with this position, press andhold the RTN button on the transmitter.
*The larger cursor is used to indicate the output of the motor
FKDQQHO7KLVFXUVRUUHÀHFWVDQ\WKURWWOHFXUYHVDQGPRWRU
mixing which may be active.

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.

Ɣ6HW5HVHWWKHRQHWLPHRSHUDWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ONE TIME] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the [ACT] by scrolling the touch sensor
and touch the RTN button to set the one time
operation.
* When you want to reset one time operation, set the ACT/INH item to [INH] and then reset it to [ON].

144 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

Ɣ7KURWWOHFXUYHEXWWRQWhen "CURVE" button is chosen, a throttle
curve screen opens.
*When a throttle function is assigned to either channel, the"CURVE" button is not displayed because a throttle curve
does not function as a motor curve.

RUD to ELE[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general

This function is used when you want to mix
elevator operation with rudder operation. It is used
to correct undesirable tendencies when rudder isapplied in rolling maneuvers such as, knife edgeÀLJKW

ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ Link mixing can be set: Links this mix to other mixes.

ŏ Select [RUD to ELE] at the Modelmenu and access the setup screen
shown below by touching the RTN
button.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURN

Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling thetouch sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to activate thefunction and return to the cursor mode. (ONis displayed.)
When selecting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and touch the RTN button tocall the selection screen. Select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

ƔSRLQWFXUYHVHWWLQJ DLUSODQH[Curve rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting
item (left side) you want to adjust and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

2. Repeat this procedure for each point.
[Moving curve point]
1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to adjust and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the curve point by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Adjustment range: Up to 2.5 in front of theadjoining point*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the curve
position is reset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point.
[Deleting/returning curve point]Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to delete/return and touch
the RTN button for one second.

Ɣ/LQNPRGHVHWWLQJ
When selecting the link mixing, move thecursor to the [LINK] item and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the ON mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*The display blinks.

Touch the RTN button to set the link modeand return to the cursor mode.

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 145

SNAP ROLL

[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general

This function selects the switch and rateadjustment of ailerons, elevators, and rudder whena snap roll is performed.
ŏ Four snap roll directions can be set. (Right/up,
right/down, left/up, left/down)ŏ Operation mode: When [Master] mode is selected,
the Snap Roll function is turned ON/OFF by themaster switch. It is possible to set the direction
switch was switched to the direction in which you
want to snap roll. When [Single] mode is selected,
the snap roll in each direction can be executedby means of independent switches and positions.
ŏ A safety switch can be set to prevent the
inadvertent activation of the snap roll. For
example, the landing gear is lowered, even if
the switch is turned on accidentally the snap rollwould not be executed. The snap roll switch isactivated only when the safety switch is OFF.

([DPSOH 6HWWLQJH[DPSOHIRU)$ŏ Mode: [Master]ŏ Safety SW: [SG] (Safety measure)ŏ Master SW: [SH] (Main switch for executing
snap roll)ŏ Direction switches:*The snap roll up side left and right and down side left and right
direction switches are selected here.
Right/Up: OFF [SD]Right/Down: OFF [SD]Left/Up: OFF [SA]Left/Down: OFF [SA]

ŏ Select [SNAP ROLL] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

RETURN

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

ŏ To next page

ŏ Master/single mode
selection

ŏ Direction switches

146 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

Setting method
Ɣ0DVWHUVLQJOHPRGHVHOHFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [MODE] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode. Select the master or single
mode by scrolling the touch sensor.
*The display blinks.

[MASTER]: Master mode
[SINGLE]: Single mode
Touch the RTN button to select the modeand return to the cursor mode.
When setting a master switch, move thecursor to the [MASTER-SW] item and touch
the RTN button to access the selection
screen. Select the switch and set its ON
direction.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

When setting a safety switch, move thecursor to the [SAFETY-SW] item and touch the
RTN button to access the selection screen.
Select the switch and set its ON direction.

Ɣ'LUHFWLRQVZLWFKVHOHFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the direction switch item
and touch the RTN button to access theselection screen. Select the switch and set its
ON direction.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

Ɣ5DWHDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the aileron, elevator or
rudder item for each direction and touch the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate independently by scrolling
the touch sensor.
Initial value: (Dependent upon the snap rolldirection)
Adjustment range: -150~150
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 147

MODEL MENU (HELICOPTER)
This section contains information on thecommands that apply to helicopters only. For
instructions on Airplanes and Sailplanes, refer tothe sections pertaining to those aircraft.
Use the Model Type function in the Linkage
Menu to select the swash type matched to therespective aircraft.
Also, activate/deactivate flight conditions
according to your model. To do so, access at theCondition Select screen prior to adjusting the
PRGHO VSDUDPHWHUV 8SWR¿YHFRQGLWLRQVFDQEH
used)
The Dual Rate function and other functions
FRPPRQ WR DOO PRGHO W\SHV KDYH DOUHDG\ EHHQ
GHVFULEHGHOVHZKHUHLQWKLVPDQXDO3OHDVHUHIHUWR
these respective sections for information on how to
do so.

ŏ Access the Model menu shown below by
touching the RTN button twice at the home
screen, etc.
<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor

ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

RETURNŏ To next page

ŏ Select the function you
want to set and accessthe setup screen bytouching the RTN button.

Model Menu functions (helicopter) list
PIT CURVE:$GMXVWVSLWFKVHWWLQJVLQGLIIHUHQWÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVTHR CURVE:7KURWWOHFXUYHDQGKRYHULQJWULPDGMXVWPHQWLQGLIIHUHQWÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV
THR HOLD: Moves the throttle to idle during autorotation
SWASH MIX:&RPSHQVDWHVFRQWUROUHVSRQVHLQGLIIHUHQWÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV
THROTTLE MIX: Compensates for power loss when cyclic applied
PIT to NEEDLE:$GMXVWVSLWFKUHVSRQVHLQGLIIHUHQWÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV
PIT to RUD: Compensates torque changes from pitch angle inputs
GYRO: Used to switch gyro sensitivity
GOVERNOR:8VHGWRVZLWFK530RIWKHKHOLFRSWHU¶VKHDG

148 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>

PIT CURVE/PIT TRIM
Pitch Curve
This function adjusts the pitch operation curvefor each flight condition to optmize the model's
performance in relationship to the throttle stick position.
ŏ Select [PIT CURVE] at the Model menu and accessthe setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.

$VLPSOHFXUYHFDQEHFUHDWHGE\UHGXFLQJWKHQXPEHURILQSXWSRLQWVWRWZRRUWKUHHDQGWKHQHQWHULQJWKHVSHFL¿HG
value at the corresponding points.
(Currently selected condition name)<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏ curve rateŏ curve point

Setting methodƔSRLQWFXUYHVHWWLQJ[Curve rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting
item you want to adjust and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: P1: -100, P2: -50, P3: 0, P4:
50, P5: 100
Adjustment range: -100~100
:KHQWKH571EXWWRQLVWRXFKHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLV
reset to the initial value.

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point as
desired.
[Moving curve point]
1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to adjust and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the curve point by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: P1: (0), P2: 25, P3: 50, P4:75, P5: (100)
Adjustment range: Up to 2.5 in front of theadjoining point:KHQWKH571EXWWRQLVWRXFKHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHFXUYH
position is reset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point as
desired.
[Deleting/returning curve point]*The graph display includes the pitch
trim operation.

ŏ Pitch curve copy
1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to delete/return and touch
the RTN button for one second.

Ɣ3LWFKFXUYHFRS\IXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to COPY and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the copy destination condition byscrolling the touch sensor and touch the RTN
button. Select the [YES] and touch the RTN
button.

Normal curve adjustment)RU QRUPDO FXUYH FUHDWH D EDVLF SLWFK FXUYH FHQWHUHG
DERXWKRYHULQJ8VHWKLVIXQFWLRQWRJHWKHUZLWKWKH7+5
Curve (Normal) function and adjust the curve so that up/
GRZQFRQWUROLVEHVWDWDFRQVWDQWHQJLQHVSHHG

Idle up curve adjustment*For the high side pitch curve, set the maximum pitch
so that it does not overload the engine. For the low side
pitch curve, create curves matched to loop, roll, 3D, andother purposes and use the idle up curves according to theperformance.

Throttle hold curve adjustment*The throttle hold curve is used when executing auto
rotations.

Operation precautions

Warning
When actually starting the engine and flying,always set the idle up condition switch to OFF
and start the engine at idle.

<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> 149

Curve setting examples
7KHVFUHHQVVKRZQEHORZDUHFXUYHVFUHDWHGE\entering the pitch rate at low, center, and high side (3points or 5 points) at each condition.

When actually creating a curve, input the rate
VSHFL¿HGE\WKHPRGHO RUWKHUHIHUHQFHYDOXH 

Ɣ3LWFK Curve ([ample
Normal Curve

Idle-up 1 Curve

Idle-up 2 Curve

Hold Curve

Pitch Trim (Hovering pitch, high pitch, low pitch)[Hovering pitch trim setting]

Hovering pitch trim

Setting method

7KH+RYHULQJ3LWFKWULPIXQFWLRQWULPVWKHSLWFK
near the hovering point. Normally, it is used with
WKHKRYHULQJFRQGLWLRQ7KHKRYHULQJSLWFKFDQEH
¿QHWXQHGIRUFKDQJHVLQURWRUVSHHGDFFRPSDQ\LQJ
FKDQJHVLQWHPSHUDWXUHKXPLGLW\DQGRWKHUÀLJKW
conditions. Adjust the hovering pitch so that
URWRUVSHHGLVFRQVWDQW7KLVIXQFWLRQFDQEHXVHG
WRJHWKHUZLWKWKH+RYHULQJ7KURWWOH7ULPIXQFWLRQfor more precise operation.

ŏ Set the function to ACT [ON]. (initial setting)ŏ Select the adjustment knob.
Selection example: LD (initial setting)ŏ The trim operation mode (Mode: CTRM/
NORM) can be selected.
CTRM mode: Maximum amount of change
near center by center trim operation(recommended)
NORM mode: Normal trim (parallel
movement trim) operation. The advantage
of using this mode is that the hovering pitch
can be adjusted without changing the
curve.
ŏ The trim rate can be adjusted and theoperation direction can be changed.
ŏ Trim adjustment range (Range) setting
When this value is made small, trim can only
be used near the center.

150 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>[Low/High pitch trim setting]High Pitch/Low Pitch Trim

Setting method+LJK 3LWFK/RZ 3LWFK7ULP LV WKH SLWFK VHUYR
high side and low side trim function.

ŏ Set the function to ACT (ON).
ŏ Select the adjustment knobs.
Selection example: LS (high side), RS (lowside)
ŏ The trim rate can be adjusted and theoperation direction can be changed.
ŏ Trim acts as high side or low side trim with thecenter as the standard.

<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> 151

THR CURVE/THROTTLE HOVER TRIM
Throttle Curve
Throttle curve function adjusts the throttle
operation curve for each condition to optimize theengine speed to throttle stick movement.
7KH7KURWWOH +RYHU IXQFWLRQ WULPV WKH WKURWWOH
near the hovering point. Normally, use it withhovering conditions. Changes in rotor speed
ŏ Select [THR CURVE] at the Model menu andaccess the setup screen shown below by
touching the RTN button.

accompanying changes in the temperature,
KXPLGLW\ DQG RWKHU IOLJKW FRQGLWLRQV FDQ EH
trimmed. Adjust the throttle so that rotor rotation is
PRVWVWDEOH0RUHSUHFLVHWULPPLQJLVDOVRSRVVLEOHE\XVLQJWKLVIXQFWLRQDORQJZLWKWKH+RYHU3LWFK
function.
(Currently selected condition name)*The graph display includes the throttle
hover trim operation.
<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏ curve rateŏ curve point

Setting methodƔSRLQWFXUYHVHWWLQJ[Curve rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting
item you want to adjust and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: P1: 0, P2: 25, P3: 50, P4: 75,P5: 100
Adjustment range: 0~100

:KHQWKH571EXWWRQLVWRXFKHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLV
reset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point as
desired.
[Moving curve point]
1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to adjust and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the curve point by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: P1: (0), P2: 25, P3: 50, P4:75, P5: (100)
Adjustment range: Up to 2.5 in front of theadjoining point:KHQWKH571EXWWRQLVWRXFKHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHFXUYH
position is reset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point as desired.

ŏ Throttle curve copy
[Deleting/returning curve point]
1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to delete/return and touch
the RTN button for one second.

Ɣ7KURWWOHFXUYHFRS\IXQFWLRQ
Move the COPY item and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the copy destination condition byscrolling the touch sensor and touch the RTN
button. Select the [YES] and touch the RTN
button.

Normal curve adjustment
1RUPDO FXUYH FUHDWHV D EDVLF FXUYH FHQWHUHG DURXQG
hovering. Use it along with the normal pitch curve andadjust so that up/down control results in a constant engine
speed.

Idle up curve adjustment*Set a idle up curve that maintains a constant speed at all
times, even during operation which reduces the pitch
SHUIRUPHGLQÀLJKW&UHDWHDFXUYHPDWFKHGWRORRSUROO
3D, or other purposes and the idle up curve according to
the performance.

Operation precautions

Warning
When actually starting the engine and flying,always set the idle up condition switch to OFF
and start the engine at the idle.

152 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>

Curve setting examples
7KHFXUYHVVKRZQEHORZDUHFUHDWHGE\LQSXWWLQJthe data of the 5 points 0% (low side), 25%,50% (center), 75%, 100% (high) side for eachcondition. When actually creating a curve, enter the
SDUDPHWHUVVSHFL¿HGSHUWKHPRGHO RUWKHUHIHUHQFH
value).

Ɣ7KroWWle Curve ([ample
Normal Curve

Idle-up 1 Curve

Idle-up 2 Curve

Throttle Hover trim
[Throttle hover trim setting]Setting methodŏ Set the function to ACT ([ON]). (initial setting)ŏ Select the adjustment knob.
Selection example: RD (initial setting)ŏ The trim operation mode (Mode: CTRM/
NORM) can be selected.
CTRM mode: Maximum rate of change
near center by center trim operation(recommended)
NORM mode: Normal trim (horizontal
movement trim) operation.
ŏ The trim rate can be adjusted and theoperation direction can be set.
ŏ Trim adjustment range (Range) settingWith smaller values, the trim is only active
near the center.

<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> 153

Throttle limiter function
This function limits the high range of the throttle
PRYHPHQWE\DQ\VOLGHURUWULPPHU

[Throttle limiter setting]&RQWUROZKLFKDGMXVWVWKHOLPLWSRLQWGXULQJÀLJKWFDQEHVHW

Setting method•High side operating range setting*Set at the 3rd page of the throttle curve screen.

•Activate the function.
1. Select ACT and touch the RTN button.
2. Switch the display to ACT by scrolling thetouch sensor.
*The display blinks.
INH: Inhibit
ACT: Activate
3. Enter the selection by touching the RTN
button.

•ON/OFF switch setting
1. Select SW and touch the RTN button.
2. The H/W SET screen is displayed. Select the
hardware and touch the RTN button.
When "CTRL" is set as a "RS" side slider.
The state of full high of a throttle stick.

HIGH

Throttle
Position
Restriction“RS”Position

Full

LOW

Restriction

Full

Slow
Restriction

In "INH", the halfway
point of "HIGH" and"LOW".

*A gauge is displayed at the left side of the graph.

3. Touch the RTN button to switch to the cursor
mode.

•Low side operating range setting
1. Select LOW and touch the RTN button.
2. Adjust the low side operating range byscrolling the touch sensor.
*A gauge is displayed at the left side of the graph.

3. Touch the RTN button to switch to the cursor
mode.

•Limiter operating range adjustment control
setting
1. Select CTRL and touch the RTN button.
2. The H/W SET screen is displayed. Select the
hardware and touch the RTN button.
7KH WKURWWOH OLPLWHU RSHUDWLQJ SRVLWLRQ LV LQGLFDWHG E\ Ddotted line on the graph.
*When limiter operating range adjustment control is NULL,
the throttle limiter function is not performed.

Slow

CENTER

1. Select HIGH and touch the RTN button.
2. Adjust the high side operating range byscrolling the touch sensor.

Full•Changing the control center position
1. Select CENTER and touch the RTN button for
1 second. CENTER changes from INH to ´rate
displayµ.
2. When the CENTER rate is changed, theneutral position of the hardware set at CTRL
can be adjusted.
:KHQ&(17(5LV,1+WKHQHXWUDOSRVLWLRQEHFRPHVWKH
LOW intermediate value.

Slow:KHQ&(17(5LVFKDQJHGIURP,1+WR³UDWHGLVSOD\´WKH
CENTER rate is set to the LOW intermediate value.
7KH&(17(5UDWHFDQEHVHWEHWZHHQ+,*+DQG/2:

154 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>

THR HOLD
This function sets the throttle cut position forauto rotation. The throttle servo operating speed
FDQEHDGMXVWHG 6SHHG

Note: Initially, this setting does not assign thethrottle hold switch. Prior to adjusting theparameters for the throttle hold, we suggest
designating a throttle hold switch. To do so,access the Condition menu within the Modelmenu options.

ŏ Select [THR HOLD] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.
<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

RETURNŏServo speedŏHold positionŏCurrent positionŏHold position setting

Ɣ6HUYRVSHHGVHWWLQJ

Setting method
Ɣ+ROGFRQGLWLRQVZLWFKVHOHFWLRQUse the Condition select menu of the Modelmenu to assign the hold condition switch.
Selection example: SG

Ɣ+ROGSRVLWLRQDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the hold position item
and touch the RTN button to switch to thedata input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 17
Adjustment range: 0~50
+ROGSRVLWLRQVHWVWKHWKURWWOHFXWSRVLWLRQ$GMXVWLWVRWKDWWKHFDUEXUHWRULVFRPSOHWHO\FORVHG
:KHQWKH571EXWWRQLVWRXFKHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLV
reset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

Move the cursor to the servo speed item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay):KHQWKH571EXWWRQLVWRXFKHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLV
reset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.

Operation precautions

Warning
When actually starting the engine and flying,always set the idle up condition switch to OFF
and start the engine at idle.

<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> 155

SWASH MIX
The swash mix function is used to correct theswash plate in the aileron (roll) direction andelevator (cyclic pitch) corresponding to each
operation of each condition.
This function allows the independent rateadjustments for the ailerons, elevator and pitch.
ŏ Select [SWASH MIX] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.

Example of use
ŏ As an example, use swash mixing to correctundesirable roll tendencies.
ŏ For a condition which uses AIL to ELE, set thisfunction to ON.
If the front of the helicopter raises during aright roll, when the Rate 2 side is input andthe right aileron is operated, the elevatormoves to the down side. Tune by adjusting
the Rate.
For left roll, adjust to the Rate 1 side.
(Currently selected condition name)<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏCondition selection

Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHPL[LQJ
When using this function, move the cursor to
the [ACT] item and touch the RTN button toswitch to the data input mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
7KHGLVSOD\EOLQNV

Touch the RTN button to activate the mixing
and return to the cursor mode. (ON isdisplayed.)[Switch selection]
When [ [--]] is set, the swash mixing functionis always active and operated by merely
selecting the condition.
When setting an [ON]/[OFF] switch, move thecursor to the [SW] item and touch the RTN
button to access the selection screen. Set
the switch and its ON position.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
GHVFULSWLRQDWWKHEDFNRIWKLVPDQXDOƔ0L[LQJUDWHDGMXVWPHQW
0L L
W GM
Move the cursor to the mixing rate item you
want to correct and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Adjust therate independently by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -100~100

:KHQWKH571EXWWRQLVWRXFKHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLV
reset to the initial value.

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

Ɣ7ULPPRGH212))VHWWLQJ
When changing the trim mode, move thecursor to the [TRIM] item and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select ON/OFF by scrolling the touch sensor.
7KHGLVSOD\EOLQNV

Touch the RTN button to change the trim
mode ON/OFF and return to the cursor
mode.
*When mixing includes master side trim, select [ON] andwhen mixing does not include master trim, select [OFF].

156 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>

THROTTLE MIX

Setting example

This function corrects slowing of engine speed
FDXVHG E\ VZDVK SODWH RSHUDWLRQ GXULQJ DLOHURQ
or elevator operation. The method of applying
clockwise or counterclockwise torque when
SLURXHWWLQJFDQDOVREHFRUUHFWHG
ŏ Select [THROTTLE MIX] at the Model menu andaccess the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.

ŏ AIL to THR mixing counteracts the lag inengine RPM's when an aileron input is given
to the helicopter. Engine over-speeding
can be adjusted independently for theright aileron and left aileron inputs utilizing
Rates 1 and 2.
(Currently selected condition name)<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏCondition selection

Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHPL[LQJ
When using this function, move the cursor to
the [ACT] item and touch the RTN button toswitch to the data input mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
7KHGLVSOD\EOLQNV

Touch the RTN button to activate the mixing
and return to the cursor mode. (ON isdisplayed.)[Switch selection]
When [ [--]] is set, the swash mixing functionis always active and operated by merely
selecting the condition.
When setting an [ON]/[OFF] switch, move thecursor to the [SW] item and touch the RTN
button to call the selection screen. Set theswitch and its ON position.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
GHVFULSWLRQDWWKHEDFNRIWKLVPDQXDO

rate independently by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -100~100
:KHQWKH571EXWWRQLVWRXFKHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLV
reset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

Ɣ2SHUDWLRQPRGHVHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the [MODE] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the operation mode by scrolling thetouch sensor.
7KHGLVSOD\EOLQNVCTRM mode: Corrects near the center only.
LIN. mode: Corrects the complete range.
Touch the RTN button to change theoperation mode and return to the cursor
mode.

Ɣ0L[LQJUDWHDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the mixing rate item you
want to correct and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Adjust the<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> 157

PIT to RUD mixing (Revolution mixing)
Use this mix when you want to suppress the
UHDFWLRQWRUTXHJHQHUDWHGE\PDLQURWRUSLWFKDQG
speed changes during pitch operation. Adjust sothat the nose does not move in the rudder direction.

Note: When a GY Series or other heading holdgyro is used, since correction is performed by
the gyro, this mix is not utilized. If this function
is used when the gyro operation mode is the
AVCS mode, the neutral position will change.

ŏ Select [PIT to RUD] at the Model menu and access(Currently selected condition name)the setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.

<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURN

Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHPL[LQJ
When using this function, move the cursor to
the [ACT] item and touch the RTN button toswitch to the data input mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
7KHGLVSOD\EOLQNV

Touch the RTN button to activate the mixing
and return to the cursor mode. (ON isdisplayed.)ƔSRLQWFXUYHVHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the curve rate setting
item you want to adjust and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: P1~P5: 0
Adjustment range: -100~100
:KHQWKH571EXWWRQLVWRXFKHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLV
reset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
Repeat this procedure for each point.

Ɣ3LWFKFXUYHFRS\IXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to COPY item and touch the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the copy destination condition byscrolling the touch sensor and touch the RTN
button. Select the [YES] and touch the RTN
button.

<Normal condition mixing curve>
The mixing curve rate should be started
using smaller values.
For a rotor with a clockwise operation
direction, when pitch was input at the plusside, set these parameters so that mixing
is in the clockwise direction. First, trim athovering and then adjust the neutral
position.
1. Adjustment between slow and hovering
Repeatedly hover from take off and land
at a constant rate matched to your own
rhythm. Then adjust the pitch so that thenose of the helicopter remains steadywhen the throttle is raised and lowered.
2. Throttle high side (climbing and diving fromhovering)
Repeat climbing and diving from hovering
at a constant rate matched to your own
rhythm and adjust the pitch so that the nose
does not deflect when the throttle is raised
and lowered.

<Idle up condition mixing curve>
Set the mixing rate so that the rudder direction
at high-speed Áight is straight ahead. Adjust foreach condition used.

158 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>

GYRO mixing
This function used to adjust gyro sensitivity.
The sensitivity and operation mode (Normal mode/$9&6PRGH FDQEHVHWIRUHDFKFRQGLWLRQ
7KHJ\URVHQVLWLYLW\FDQEHVZLWFKHGZLWKHDFK
condition or the switch. (5 sensitivities)&RPSDWLEOHZLWKD[LVJ\UR &*< 

Note: When using the [Gyro2]/[Gyro3] function,
assign [Gyro2]/[Gyro3] to any channel on thefunction screen.
Always set to [--] both (Control) and (Trim) for
the [Gyro] function at the Function menu in
the Linkage menu.

ŏ Select [GYRO] at the Model menu and access the
setup screen shown below by touching the RTN
button.
<SensorTouch™>
Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏThe edit conditions can bechanged by touching theS1 button.

ŏThe edit rate can be changed by operating
the edit rate button.
*When the rate switching setting of all the gyros is³&21'´WKHHGLWUDWHEXWWRQLVQRWGLVSOD\HG*When the rate switching setting of
DOOWKHJ\URVLV³6ZLWFK´WKHHGLW
conditions are not displayed.

ŏWhen the GYRO function button is selected,
each GYRO detailed setting screen
appears.

ŏSetup screen selectionŏCondition/Switch selection(Currently selected condition name)ŏON: (initial setting)ŏGyro type selection:[GY]/[NORM]
ŏFine tuning VR settingsŏGyro sensitivity adjustmentŏMode selection:[AVCS]/[NORM]<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> 159

Setting method
Ɣ*\URW\SHVHOHFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the gyro type selection
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode. Select the gyro typeby scrolling the touch sensor.
[GY]: When a Futaba GY gyro is used
[NORM]: When other than Futaba GY gyro isused
Touch the RTN button to change the gyrotype and return to the cursor mode.

(;$03/(!5XGGHUJ\URJDLQLVFKDQJHGZLWK
a switch (SF) irrespective of condition.
Generally, gain is interlocked with conditionand changes a rate.
How to change two rates in the same
condition here.
1. Select [GYRO] at the Model menu andaccess the setup screen shown below by
touching the RTN button.

:KHQD)XWDED*<J\URLVXVHGDQG>*<@W\SHLVVHOHFWHG
WKHVHQVLWLYLW\VHWYDOXHLVGLUHFWO\UHDGLQERWKWKH$9&6
and NORM modes.

Ɣ2SHUDWLRQPRGHVHOHFWLRQ *<J\UR
Move the cursor to the operation mode
selection item and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Selectthe operation mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
[AVCS]: AVCS mode
[NORM]: Normal mode
Touch the RTN button to change theoperation mode and return to the cursor
mode.

Ɣ6HQVLWLYLW\VHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the rate item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the sensitivity by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 80
Adjustment range: 0~100

2. Move the cursor to the [COND] item
and touch the RTN button to access theselection screen. Select the [SW]. Touch the
RTN button to return to the cursor mode.

3. # number shows the present switch state. In
the state of # 1 a cursor is moved to [--] and
RTN is pushed.

4. [SF] is chosen by [H/W SELECT] and then a
top is turned ON.

:KHQ WKH 571 EXWWRQ LV WRXFKHG IRU RQH VHFRQG WKHsensitivity is reset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.

Ɣ)LQHWXQLQJ95VHWWLQJV
Move the cursor to the [--] item and touch
the RTN button to access the selection
screen. Select the control.

5. [TYPE GY] and [RATE] of a state of "#1 SF
top"are set up.

SF : Top = #1

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
GHVFULSWLRQDWWKHEDFNRIWKLVPDQXDOMove the cursor to the rate item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the trim rate by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -20~20
:KHQ WKH 571 EXWWRQ LV WRXFKHG IRU RQH VHFRQG WKHsensitivity is reset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.

● The numberof a SW state

6. It is a setup of "#2". Move the cursor to the[#1] item and touch the RTN button toaccess the selection screen. Select the [#2].
Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.

160 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>

7. Move the cursor to the [--] item and touch
the RTN button.
8. [SF] is chosen by [H/W SELECT] and then abottom is turned ON. the RTN button.
9. [TYPE GY] and [RATE] of a state of "#2 SF
bottom"are set up.

SF : Bottom = #2

● The numberof a SW state,ISRVLWLRQVZLWFKLVFKRVHQWKHFKDQJHRIUDWHVFDQEH
performed.
&RPELQHGXVHRIWZRRUPRUHVZLWFKHVFDQQRWEHSHUIRUPHG

<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> 161

GOVERNOR mixing:KHQ XVLQJ D )XWDED *9*<&*<
JRYHUQRUWKLVIXQFWLRQLVXVHGWRVZLWFKWKH530
of the helicopter's rotor head. The rotor head speed
FDQEHVZLWFKHGZLWKHDFKFRQGLWLRQRUWKHVZLWFK
7KH JRYHUQRU LV XVHG E\ FRQQHFWLQJ WKH JRYHUQRU VSHHG
VHWWLQJFKDQQHOWR&+ LQLWLDOVHWWLQJ *When using an independent governor [ON]/[OFF] switch,connect the AUX([ON]/[OFF]) connector of the governor to&+DQGVHWWKHVZLWFKWR&+ *RYHUQRU DWWKH)XQFWLRQ
menu of the Linkage Menu.

Note: Always set (Control) and (Trim) to [--]
for [Governor] of the Function menu of the
Linkage menu.

ŏ Select [GOVERNOR] at the Model menu and accessthe setup screen shown below by touching the RTN
button.

ŏSetup screen selectionŏCondition/Switch selection(Currently selected condition name)ŏACT/INH: INH (initial setting)<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the Modelmenu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

ŏ To next page

RETURNŏUnit display selection:[]/[rpm]

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting valueŏFine tuning VR settingsŏRPM adjustment

Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHPL[LQJ
When using this function, move the cursor to
the [INH] item and touch the RTN button toswitch to the data input mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
7KHGLVSOD\EOLQNV

Touch the RTN button to activate the mixing
and return to the cursor mode. (ON isdisplayed.)
When the Governor is changed from thedefault inhibited (INH) state to the active(ACT) state, the endpoint menu will be
displayed and it is possible to utilize theendpoints for this given condition.

Use the SensorTouch to scroll to either YES(incorporate the default endpoints) or NO(endpoints are not utilized. Press the Return(RTN) button to conÀrm the selection made.

Ɣ530DGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the rate item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the rpm by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 50 (1500rpm)
Adjustment range: OFF, 0~110 (OFF,
700~3500rpm):KHQ WKH 571 EXWWRQ LV WRXFKHG IRU RQH VHFRQG WKHsensitivity is reset to the initial value.)

Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
*When the function is set ON/OFF at the governor setup
screen, the governor rpm setting channel end point servo
travel and limit point are now initialized.
:KHQFKDQJHGIURP,1+WR$&7 21 WKHVHUYRWUDYHOLV
initialized to 100 and the limit point is initialized to 155.
:KHQ RSHUDWLRQ LV FKDQJHG WR ,1+ DW DOO FRQGLWLRQV WKH
servo travel is initialized to 100 and the limit point isinitialized to 135.

Ɣ8QLWGLSOD\VHOHFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the UNIT item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the unit by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Touch the RTN button to change theoperation mode and return to the cursormode.

162 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>

Ɣ'LSOD\PRGHVHOHFWLRQ:KHQ >USP@ PRGH LV VHOHFWHG DERYH VHWWLQJ WKH GLVSOD\
PRGHFDQEHVHOHFWHG
* There is no change in the transmitter output even when the02'(LVFKDQJHG&DOLEUDWLRQVKRXOGEHSHUIRUPHGYLD
the governor.
,Q RUGHU WR XVH WKH *RYHUQRU IXQFWLRQ RI WKH ); LW LV
necessary to change the settings on the governor for the low
side 700 rpm mode.

When the MODE of the Governor screen's
model menu is changed, the change is also
indicated on-screen.

The chart below indicates the mode percentage andthe corresponding RPM.

MODE

0％

50％

<EXAMPLE>RPM rate is changed with aswitch (SF) irrespective of condition.
Generally, RPM rate is interlocked withcondition and changes a rate.
How to change two rates in the same
condition here.
1. Select [GOVERNOR] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown below
by touching the RTN button.

2. Move the cursor to the [COND] item
and touch the RTN button to access theselection screen. Select the [SW]. Touch the
RTN button to return to the cursor mode.
And [INH] is set to [ACT].

100％ 110％

1000-2000rpm 1000rpm 1500rpm 2000rpm 2100rpm
1000-2500rpm 1000rpm 1500rpm 2500rpm 2700rpm
1000-3500rpm 1000rpm 1500rpm 3500rpm 3900rpm
700-2000rpm 700rpm 1500rpm 2000rpm 2100rpm
700-2500rpm 700rpm 1500rpm 2500rpm 2700rpm
700-3500rpm 700rpm 1500rpm 3500rpm 3900rpm

3. # number shows the present switch state. In
the state of # 1 a cursor is moved to [--] and
RTN is pushed.

Ɣ)LQHWXQLQJ95VHWWLQJV
Move the cursor to the [--] item and touch
the RTN button to access the selection
screen. Select the control.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
GHVFULSWLRQDWWKHEDFNRIWKLVPDQXDOMove the cursor to the rate item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the trim rate by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0 (0rpm)
Adjustment range: -20~20 (-200~200rpm):KHQ WKH 571 EXWWRQ LV WRXFKHG IRU RQH VHFRQG WKHsensitivity is reset to the initial value.)

4. [SF] is chosen by [H/W SELECT] and then a
top is turned ON.

5. [MODE] and [RATE] of a state of "#1 SF
top"are set up.
SF : Top = #1 ● The numberof a SW state

Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.

6. It is a setup of "#2". Move the cursor to
the [#1] item and touch the RTN button
to access the selection screen. Select the[#2]. Touch the RTN button to return to thecursormode. And [INH] is set to [ACT].

<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> 163

2. T h e d i s p l a y s w i t c h e s t o t h e s c r e e nthat transmits the reference signal.

7. Move the cursor to the [--] item and touch
the RTN button.
8. [SF] is chosen by [H/W SELECT] and then abottom is turned ON. the RTN button.
9. [MODE] and [RATE] of a state of "#2 SF
bottom"are set up.

SF : Bottom = #2

● The numberof a SW state,I  SRVLWLRQ VZLWFK LV FKRVHQ  UDWH FKDQJHV FDQ EH
performed.
&RPELQHGXVHRIWZRRUPRUHVZLWFKHVFDQQRWEHSHUIRUPHG

Ɣ&$/EXWWRQ

3. Move the cursor to OFF and touch the
RTN button.

4. O n c e i t s c r o l l s t o t h e m o d e o f y o u r
choice, touch the RTN button.

5. Set the transmitter's displayed speed.
Adjust the governor's speed display
on its side. (Refer to your governor's
instruction manual on how to makeproper adjustments).

This function transmits a reference signal fromthe transmitter for setting the governor side
speed display. The governor and transmitterset values (speed display) can be matched.
7KH&$/EXWWRQFDQRQO\EHGLVSOD\HGLQUSPPRGH
In "ON", "CAL" appears

Button added to the reference signal output
screen. (Displayed only in the rpm mode.)

1. Move the cursor to the CAL button andtouch the RTN button.

164 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>

Timer setting

TIMER ST1/ST2

The Timer function may be set for any desiredtime, i.e. engine run time, specified times forcompetitions, etc. Two independent timers areprovided for your use. The timers are stored
independently with each model, meaning thatwhen you switch between model setups, the timer
associated with the new model is brought up
automatically.
The timers may be set to start and stop from the
motion of any switch or stick. You may set the ON and
OFF directions freely. Each timer has a capacity of up
to 59 minutes 59 seconds.
Each timer may be set for count-down (DOWN
mode) or count up (UP mode) operation with atarget time or for count up to 99 hours 59 minutes(HOUR mode).
If a target time is set and the timer reaches the set
time, a buzzer sound for each count is generated.
Countdown timers sound one short beep during
the last twenty seconds and two short beeps during
the last ten seconds before reaching the target, thena long tone at the target time, and continue counting
with displaying a minus (-) sign. Count-up timers
also beep the last twenty and ten seconds, beep thetarget time, and keep counting upwards until shutdown.
A mode which sounds an alarm each minute of
the time remaining up to the timer alarm time canbe selected.
The HOUR mode is convenient when used inengine maintenance period and other long-term
measurements.
* When the HOUR mode is set, "xx (hour): xx (minute)"
is displayed on the count time display. Seconds are notdisplayed.
* When the HOUR mode is set, ":" blinks each second during
timer operation.
* When the HOUR mode is set, the alarm function is
inhibited.

ŏ Select ST1 or ST2 at the home screen andcall the setup screen shown below by
touching the RTN button.
<SensorTouch™>ŏ Select the function nameand return to the home
screen by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.

Scrollingŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value

RETURN"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, thetransmitter will vibrate during the warning.

TYPE 1
TYPE 2TYPE 3
TYPE 4<Appendix> 165

Timer setting

7LPHURSHUDWLRQ

Ɣ8SWLPHUGRZQWLPHUVHWWLQJŏ Timer ST1 and ST2 are started/stopped by
pre-selected start/stop switch.
ŏ To reset a timer, operate the pre-selected
reset switch, or move the cursor to the [RESET]
display on the timer screen and touch the
RTN button.

Move the cursor to the [MODE] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the mode by scrolling the touch sensor
and touch the RTN button.
[UP]: Up timer[DOWN]: Down timer[HOUR]: Hour mode timer

Ɣ7LPHUWLPHVHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the [ALARM] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Set the time by scrolling the touch sensor.
[00]:[00]:[min]:[sec]Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.

Ɣ6ZLWFKVHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the item of the switch you
want to set, access the switch setup screen
by touching the RTN button. Select the switch
and ON direction.
[For a detailed description of the setting method, see [Switch
Setting Method] located on the next page.][START]: Start switch[STOP]: Stop switch[RESET]: Reset switch

Ɣ0HPRU\VHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the [MEMORY] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the mode by scrolling the touch sensor
and touch the RTN button.
[OFF]: Memory function OFF[ON]: Mode where the timer is not reset whenturned power off and switched the model.

Ɣ$PRGHZKLFKVRXQGVDQDODUPHDFKPLQXWH
FDQEHVHOHFWHG
Change the setting using the "Ç" button (or"È" button).
"Ç": Alarm sounds each minute of the time
elapsed from timer start. (Conventionalmode)"È": Alarm sounds each minute of the timeremaining up to the alarm time.

166 <Appendix>

6ZLWFK6HWWLQJ0HWKRG
The various functions used in the FX-22 canbe activated by a switch. For the purposes of thismanual, a stick position, VR position, etc. shall becommonly referred to as a switch in all cases. Thatis, whenever the manual indicates that something is
operated via a switch, it is possible for the user toactivate this setting via a stick, stick position, etc.

6ZLWFKVHOHFWLRQ
When a switch is selected at a mixing function, etc., the selection screen shown below is called.
(Switch selection screen example)

6ZLWFKVHOHFWLRQ:KHQVWLFNWULPOHYHURUNQREVHOHFWHG

1. Use the touch sensor to move the cursor(highlights) to the switch you want toselect and touch the RTN button.

When a stick, trim lever, or knob is used as aswitch, two operation modes can be selected:*The switch blinks.

2. To return to the preceeding screen, movethe cursor to the [H/W SELECT] at the topof the screen and touch the RTN button.
Or, move the cursor to the [ON/OFF] andcall the ON/OFF position setting screen bytouching the RTN button.

:KHQVZLWFKLVVHOHFWHG
When switch was selected, ON/OFF position
setting is also performed.

1. When you want to change the mode,
move the cursor to [MODE] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to thedata input mode. Switch the display
to the mode you want to change byscrolling the touch sensor and then makethe change by touching the RTN button.
ŏMode: [LIN]/[SYM]*Set the ON/Off point by the method described on the next page.

$OWHUQDWHPRGHVHWWLQJ*The ON/OFF setting state of each position is displayed.

1. When you want to change the ON/OFF
setting, use the touch sensor to move thecursor and touch the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode. Switch the ON/
Off display by scrolling the touch sensor.
*ON/OFF display blinks.

2. When the RTN button is touched, the ON/
OFF setting is changed. (Touch the S1
button to stop the change.)
3. To return to the preceeding screen, movethe cursor to the [ON/OFF] at the top of
the screen and touch the RTN button.

ŏALTERNATE mode: [OFF]/[ON]1. Move the cursor to the [ALTERNATE] item
and touch the RTN button to switch to thedata input mode.
2. Change to the mode you want to set byscrolling the touch sensor.
*The mode display blinks.

3. Touch the RTN button. (Touch the S1 button
to stop the change.)
4. To return to the preceeding screen, movethe cursor to the [ON/OFF] at the top of thescreen and touch the RTN button.

<Appendix> 167

2SHUDWLRQPRGHV
The operation modes available when stick, trim
lever, or knob was selected are described below.

6KLIWLQJWKH212IISRLQWThe ON/OFF point can be shifted. ON/OFF ata free position can be changed.

/LQHDUPRGH>/,1@ŏBlack range: OFF rangeŏWhite range: ON range

This mode sets ON/OFF to the left or right (upor down) with the set point as the reference.
6\PPHWULFDOPRGH>6<0@

Left and right (up and down) operations are
symmetrical near the neutral position. For instance,
when you want to switch D/R with the aileron
stick, when the stick is moved to the left or right,
DR can be turned on at the same position.

168 <Appendix>[Setting method]
1. First, use the touch sensor to move thecursor to the [POS] item.
2. Move the stick, trim lever, or knob to thepoint you want to change and touch the
RTN button. The point is shifted.
3. To return to the preceeding screen, movethe cursor to the [ON/OFF] at the top of
the screen and touch the RTN button.

/RJLFVZLWFK &RQGLWLRQ6HOHFWIXQFWLRQRQO\
The logic switch function lets you turn operation on and off by combining two switches.
/RJLFPRGH
AND: When both switches are ON, thecondition is ON.
OR: When either switch is ON, the condition
is ON.
EX-OR: When the two switches are indifferent states, the condition is ON.

6ZLWFKPRGHVHOHFWLRQ
1. Move the cursor to the [SINGLE] item andtouch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the [LOGIC] by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*[LOGIC] display blinks.

3. Touch the RTN button to change to thelogic switch mode.
(Logic switch setting screen)/RJLFPRGHVHOHFWLRQ
1. Move the cursor to the logic mode item
and touch the RTN button to switch to thedata input mode.
2. Select the logic mode by scrolling thetouch sensor. [AND, OR or EX-OR]*The mode display blinks.

3. Touch the RTN button to change to thelogic mode.

6ZLFKVHOHFWLRQ
1. Select the right and left switch respectively.
(Refer to the description at the previous
page.)To return to the preceeding screen, movethe cursor to the [SWITCH] at the top of thescreen and touch the RTN button.

<Appendix> 169

83'$7,1*
Your Futaba FX-22 transmitter programming can be updated easily online. When functions are added or
LPSURYHGWKHXSGDWH¿OHFDQEHGRZQORDGHGIURPRXUZHEVLWH&RS\WKHXSGDWH¿OHVWRWKH6'FDUGDQGWKHQ
use the following procedure to update the program.
Check our web site for the FAQ regarding updating for more information.
[Updating procedure]ŔőŃŶŧŃƆƄƕƇŃƉƒƕƐƄƗ

<RXZLOOrUVWZDQWWRIRUPDW\RXU6'FDUGWRWKH);,I\RXDUHXVLQJDQH[LVWLQJ6'FDUGDQ\
GDWDSUHYLRXVO\VDYHGWRLWZLOOEHGHOHWHGGXULQJWKHIRUPDW:HVXJJHVW\RXHLWKHUVDYHWKLVGDWDRQ\RXUFRPSXWHURUSXUFKDVHDQHZFDUG
$IWHULQVHUWLQJWKHQHZ6'FDUGLQWRWKHWUDQVPLWWHUWXUQRQWKHSRZHUVZLWFK<RXZLOOVHHWKHZRUG)250$7LI\RXKDYHQRWSUHYLRXVO\XVHGWKLVFDUGLQWKHWUDQVPLWWHU
3OHDVHVHOHFW<(6DQGWRXFKn571| 7KHIROORZLQJVFUHHQLVGLVSOD\HGGXULQJIRUPDWWLQJ:KHQWKHIRUPDWLVFRPSOHWHGWKHIROORZLQJVFUHHQLVGLVSOD\HG
7XUQRíWKHSRZHUVZLWFKDQGUHPRYHWKH6'FDUGIURPLWVVORWŕőŃųƕƈƓƄƕƌƑƊŃƗƋƈŃƖƒƉƗƚƄƕƈŃƘƓƇƄƗƈŃƆƄƕƇő

3OHDVHXQ]LSWKH]LSSHGrOH7KHIROORZLQJrOHVZLOOEHFUHDWHG
‫؞‬7VJ8SGDWHH[H)LOHFRS\XWLOLW\‫؞‬7VJ8SGDWHGDW,QIRUPDWLRQrOHIRU7VJ8SGDWHH[H‫؞‬76*B83'$7(GDW‫ؼ‬,GHQWLrHGrOHRI76*‫؞‬76*B76ELQ8SGDWHrOHRI76* SLHFH ‫؞‬76*B$3ELQ8SGDWHrOHRI76* SLHFH ‫؞‬76*B83/'ELQ8SGDWHrOHRI76* SLHFH ,QVHUWWKH IRUPDWWHG6'FDUGLQWRDFDUGUHDGHULQ\RXU3&3OHDVHUXQ7VJ8SGDWHH[H

170 <Appendix>

6HOHFWWKHGULYHWKDW\RXUFDUGUHDGHULVDVVLJQHGWRLQ\RXU
3&

Update

$IWHUWKH8SGDWHrOHVDUHFRSLHGWRWKH6'FDUGWKHIROORZLQJVFUHHQVDUHGLVSOD\HG&OLFNWKH(QGEXWWRQ

ŖőŃŸƓƇƄƗƈŃƖƒƉƗƚƄƕƈŃƒƉŃũŻŐŕŕŃ

3OHDVHLQVHUWWKH6'FDUGZKLFKLQFOXGHVWKHXSGDWHrOH
3XVKWKH+20((;,7EXWWRQ
:KLOHVWLOOKROGLQJWKH+20((;,7EXWWRQSRZHURQWKH
WUDQVPLWWHU

$IWHUDIHZVHFRQGVWKHIROORZLQJVFUHHQLVGLVSOD\HG

PROGRAM UPDATESTART : PUSH MON . 3SEC

PROGRAM UPDATE

3XVKWKH80(18021EXWWRQIRUWKUHHVHFRQGV7KH
VRIWZDUHXSGDWHZLOOEHJLQ
:KHQWKHXSGDWHLVFRPSOHWHWKHIROORZLQJVFUHHQLVGLVSOD\HG7XUQRí
WKHSRZHUVZLWFKUP LOADINGPROGRAM UPDATECOMPLETED5HPRYHWKH6'FDUG
3OHDVHFKHFNWKHVRIWZDUHYHUVLRQDW,1)2LQ6<67(0PHQXX.X<Appendix> 171

,QVWDOOLQJ6SHHFK'DWD
There are three language versions, English, German, and Japanese, in speech data. It is possible to install
only one language.
,I\RXLQVWDOODVHFRQGODQJXDJHLWZLOORYHUULGHWKH¿UVWRQHWKDW\RXLQVWDOOHG
[Installing procedure]ŔőŃŰƄƎƌƑƊŃƒƉŃƆƄƕƇŃƉƒƕŃƌƑƖƗƄƏƏƌƑƊŃƖƓƈƈƆƋŃƇƄƗƄ

3OHDVHXQ]LSWKH]LSSHGrOH7KHIROORZLQJrOHVZLOOEHFUHDWHG
(QJOLVK9HUVLRQ‫؞‬7VJ,QVWDOO6RXQG(QJH[H)LOHFRS\XWLOLW\‫؞‬7VJ8SGDWHGDW,QIRUPDWLRQrOHIRU7VJ,QVWDOO6RXQG(QJH[H‫؞‬76*B,167$//B6281'GDW‫ؼ‬,GHQWLrHGrOH‫؞‬7VJ6SHHFK(QJELQ'DWDrOH SLHFH ‫؞‬7VJ6SHHFK(QJELQ'DWDrOH SLHFH ‫؞‬7VJ6SHHFK(QJELQ'DWDrOH SLHFH *HUPDQ9HUVLRQ‫؞‬7VJ,QVWDOO6RXQG(QJH[H)LOHFRS\XWLOLW\‫؞‬7VJ8SGDWHGDW,QIRUPDWLRQrOHIRU7VJ,QVWDOO6RXQG(QJH[H‫؞‬76*B,167$//B6281'GDW‫ؼ‬,GHQWLrHGrOH‫؞‬7VJ6SHHFK*HUELQ'DWDrOH SLHFH ‫؞‬7VJ6SHHFK*HUELQ'DWDrOH SLHFH ‫؞‬7VJ6SHHFK*HUELQ'DWDrOH SLHFH -DSDQHVH9HUVLRQ‫؞‬7VJ,QVWDOO6RXQG(QJH[H)LOHFRS\XWLOLW\‫؞‬7VJ8SGDWHGDW,QIRUPDWLRQrOHIRU7VJ,QVWDOO6RXQG(QJH[H‫؞‬76*B,167$//B6281'GDW‫ؼ‬,GHQWLrHGrOH‫؞‬7VJ6SHHFK-SQELQ'DWDrOH SLHFH ‫؞‬7VJ6SHHFK-SQELQ'DWDrOH SLHFH ‫؞‬7VJ6SHHFK-SQELQ'DWDrOH SLHFH ,QVWDOOWKHDOUHDG\IRUPDWWHG6'FDUGLQWR\RXU3& VFDUGUHDGHU
3OHDVHUXQ7VJ,QVWDOO6RXQG

172 <Appendix>

H[H

6HOHFWWKHGULYHWKDW\RXUFDUGUHDGHULVDVVLJQHGWRLQ\RXU
3&&OLFN2.

Update

$IWHUWKH8SGDWHrOHVDUHFRSLHGWRWKH6'FDUGWKHIROORZLQJVFUHHQVDUHGLVSOD\HG&OLFNWKH(QG
EXWWRQŕőŃŬƑƖƗƄƏƏŃƖƓƈƈƆƋŃƇƄƗƄŃƒƉŃũŻŐŕŕŃ

3OHDVHLQVHUWWKH6'FDUGZKLFKLQFOXGHVWKHLQVWDOOLQJVSHHFKGDWD
3XVKWKH+20((;,7EXWWRQ
6WLOOKROGLQJWKH+20((;,7EXWWRQSRZHURQWKH
WUDQVPLWWHU

$IWHUDIHZVHFRQGVWKHIROORZLQJVFUHHQLVGLVSOD\HG
3UHVVWKH80(18021EXWWRQIRUWKUHHVHFRQGV7KHVSHHFKGDWD
EHJLQVWRLQVWDOO

INSTALLSOUNDSTART : PUSH MON . 3SEC

INSTALLSOUND
INSTALLING

$IWHUDERXWVHFRQGVXSORDGLQJUHDFKHVWKHULJKWRIWKHSURJUHVVEDU
DQGWKHQEHJLQVDJDLQDIWHUDSDXVHINSTALLSOUND

7KHXSORDGLQJPD\DSSHDUWRSURJUHVVVORZO\INSTALLSOUND
INSTALLING

7KHSURJUHVVEDUZLOODJDLQXSORDG7KLVFDQWDNHDIHZPLQXWHV $ERXW INSTALLSOUNDCOMPLETEDPLQ$QGn&203/(7('|LVGLVSOD\HG3OHDVHWXUQRíWKHSRZHU

'RQ WWXUQRíWKHSRZHUEHIRUH&203/(7('LVGLVSOD\HG3OHDVHGHWDFK6'FDUG
3OHDVHFKHFNWKHODQJXDJHDW7(/(06(7PHQXLQ/,1.$*(PHQX<Appendix> 173

FUTABA CORPORATION Phone: +81 475 32 6982, Facsimile: +81 475 32 6983
1080 Yabutsuka, Chosei-mura, Chosei-gun, Chiba-ken, 299-4395, Japan©FUTABA CORPORATION

174 <Appendix>

2013, 9 (1)